WO2014166214A1 - Tti switching method, base station and user equipment - Google Patents

Tti switching method, base station and user equipment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014166214A1
WO2014166214A1 PCT/CN2013/084194 CN2013084194W WO2014166214A1 WO 2014166214 A1 WO2014166214 A1 WO 2014166214A1 CN 2013084194 W CN2013084194 W CN 2013084194W WO 2014166214 A1 WO2014166214 A1 WO 2014166214A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user equipment
base station
tti
tfci
handover
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2013/084194
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
冯莉
郑潇潇
陈君
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201380010284.6A priority Critical patent/CN105264950B/en
Publication of WO2014166214A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014166214A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment. Background technique
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple
  • the DCH channel As one of the mainstream technologies of the third generation mobile communication system, Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access has been widely studied and applied worldwide.
  • the DCH channel called R99 DCH, is introduced in the Rel-99 version of the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project).
  • the R99 DCH channel has good coverage but can only increase the data rate.
  • the HSUPA High-Speed Uplink Packet Access
  • the transport channel introduced in HSUPA is E-DCH (Enhanced Dedicated Channel).
  • the E-DCH includes two Transmission Time Interval (TTI) types, 2ms TTI and 10ms TTI, of which 2ms TTI can provide high data transmission rate and small transmission delay; 10ms ⁇ can provide better coverage.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the coverage of the R99 DCH is greater than the E-DCH lOmsTTI, so when the UE moves to the cell edge, even if the UE is currently using the E-DCH lOmsTTI, there is a possibility that the coverage still has a problem, and the UE needs to be switched from the E-DCH 1 OmsTTI to The TTI corresponding to the DCH.
  • E-DCH ⁇ switching involves two aspects: coverage measurement and E-DCH TTI The execution flow of the switch.
  • the first is the coverage measurement.
  • the UE sends the UPH to the base station through SI (Scheduling Information), where UPH (UE transmission power headroom, UE transmit power headroom), and UPH is the maximum UE transmit power and DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control). Channel, dedicated physical control channel) power ratio.
  • SI Service Information
  • UPH UE transmission power headroom, UE transmit power headroom
  • UPH is the maximum UE transmit power
  • DPCCH dedicated Physical Control
  • Channel dedicated physical control channel
  • the execution flow of the E-DCH TTI handover has two methods: synchronous reconfiguration and asynchronous reconfiguration.
  • the synchronous reconfiguration refers to the base station controller (Radio Network Control, RNC) respectively.
  • RNC Radio Network Control
  • the UE and the base station are configured with a CFN (Connection Frame Number) of the TTI handover, and the UE switches to the target ⁇ type in the designated CFN, and the base station parses the E-DCH data sent by the UE according to the target ⁇ type in the specified CF.
  • CFN Connection Frame Number
  • the synchronous reconfiguration method includes:
  • the RNC determines to perform a TTI handover, and then the RNC sends an RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling to the UE, such as a RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION REQUEST, indicating that the UE switches to the target type, where the radio bearer
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the reconfiguration request contains an activation time, which can be expressed, for example, by CF.
  • the RNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the base station (eg, NodeB), which carries the new configuration, including the ⁇ type; then the base station sends a response message to the RNC (RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready, wireless chain
  • the route reconfiguration message is sent, and then the RNC sends a Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm message to the base station, where the radio link reconfiguration confirmation message carries the activation time, for example, also indicated by CF, and the activation time is used.
  • the base station is instructed to parse the uplink data according to the target TTI at the specified activation time.
  • the UE sends a RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE message to the RNC.
  • the process of asynchronous reconfiguration is similar to the process of synchronous reconfiguration, except that the activation time is not specified in the message, and the UE switches to the target as soon as possible after receiving the reconfiguration request, and the base station is also the same.
  • the uplink data is parsed by the new TTI, and the specific process will not be described here.
  • Sending new configuration information to the base station requires at least three signaling interactions between the RNC and the base station to complete the handover. Therefore, such a handover mechanism may cause the TTI handover to be untimely and has a large delay, especially in the When the 2msTTI is switched to lOmsTTI, such delay may cause E-DCH data to be lost or even dropped.
  • the base station cannot accurately determine the timing of the UE switching to the target ,. After receiving the reconfiguration signaling sent by the RNC, the base station needs to try to parse the two TTI types before and after the handover, so the hardware resources of the base station are wasted. Summary of the invention
  • the embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment, so as to avoid the problem of data loss or dropped calls caused by a large delay and no timely handover when the TTI is switched.
  • a first aspect of the present invention provides a TTI handover method, including: receiving, by a user equipment, first configuration information corresponding to a first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to a second UI; the user equipment receiving handover indication information sent by a base station The user equipment switches the current TTI to the target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target ⁇ is the The first device and the other one of the second ports; the user equipment transmits data to the base station at the target TTI.
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the method further includes: the user equipment is carried in the E-DPCCH
  • the E-TFCI is prohibited from being used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, the user equipment Transmitting a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where The non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment When the current ⁇ is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E) - TFCI) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
  • the user equipment When the current ⁇ is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the user equipment sends a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E) - TFCI) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI being predefined or configurable.
  • E enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the method further includes: the user equipment corresponding to the target The uplink scrambling code transmits control information or data to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
  • the method further includes: using, by the user equipment, domain information in the DPCCH Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received.
  • the method further includes: the user equipment receiving the handover The acknowledgment information is sent to the base station within a maximum time after the indication information, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the target TTI. Specifically, when the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the first network The user equipment sends data to the base station by using the first TTI after the next M subframes after the sending of the acknowledgement information, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero. ; or
  • N is predefined or configurable and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the user equipment sends data to the target Before the base station, it also includes:
  • the user equipment clears data in the HARQ buffer
  • the user equipment resets the uplink enhanced entity (MAC-i/is) entity and sets TSN to zero.
  • MAC-i/is uplink enhanced entity
  • the method further includes: the user equipment constructs data in the HARQ buffer as a MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ;; and the user equipment resets the MAC-i/is entity, and sets the TSN to 0.
  • the user equipment sends data to the target
  • the base station the method includes: deleting, by the user equipment, a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to a TTI that is not successfully sent before the handover; the user equipment constructs a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where In the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; the user equipment sends the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ .
  • the user equipment when in the first TTI and in the When the same TBS table is used, the user equipment sends the data to the base station by using the target ⁇ , and the method includes: the first corresponding to the TTI before the handover of the user equipment that is not successfully sent by the physical layer.
  • the data is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target TTI; the user equipment sends the Second data.
  • the user equipment receives the first configuration information of the first UI Before the second configuration information of the second TTI, the method further includes: the user equipment sends capability indication information that supports the handover.
  • the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, Specifically, the user equipment receives an HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
  • the first configuration information includes the first Corresponding first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter
  • the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
  • the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first UI
  • the present invention further provides a method for switching, comprising:
  • the base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first port and the second configuration information corresponding to the second port; the base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the method further includes: the base station receiving the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the base station sends, to the user equipment, handover indication information that requires the user equipment to perform TTI handover, specifically: If the acknowledgment information is not received by the base station, the handover indication information is re-transmitted, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the base station An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) for use by the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); and based on the E-TFCI, confirming that the user equipment has received The handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
  • DPCCH separate physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the method further includes: when the current If the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, the base station receives the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment. Ensuring a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirming, based on the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable Or,
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the base station When the current ⁇ type is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than the second threshold, the base station receives the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of (E-TFCI), and confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI is predefined Or configurable.
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the method further includes: sending, by the base station, an uplink enhancement to the radio network controller. Entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indication or MAC-is Reset indication.
  • the base station sends the user equipment to the user equipment After the handover indication information is switched, the method further includes: sending, by the base station, the switched target of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
  • the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI switching And transmitting, by the base station, the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment, where the base station is in the working mode of the open handover, the base station sends the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the switching indication information of the TTI handover is sent.
  • the base station when the base station is in the working mode of the closed handover, the base station receives the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and The working mode in which the base station is switched by the off TTI is switched to the working mode in which the TTI switching is turned on.
  • the base station receives the first TTI corresponding to Before the first configuration information and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, the method further includes: the base station sending, to the radio network controller, capability indication information that supports TTI handover.
  • the base station is used to the user equipment Simultaneously or after transmitting the handover indication information of the TTI handover, the method further includes: the base station transmitting the indication information to the radio network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that The non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
  • the indication information includes time information for switching to the target ⁇ .
  • the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes a control channel for determining that the user equipment sends the handover indication acknowledgement information
  • the power of the handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a first receiving unit configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, where the second receiving unit is configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the base station, and the switching indication information
  • the switching unit is configured to receive the handover indication information from the second receiving unit, and switch the current TTI to a target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current ⁇ is One of the first ⁇ and the second ,, the target ⁇ is another one of the first ⁇ and the second ;
  • a first sending unit configured to send data to the target ⁇ The base station.
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to carry the prohibited use in the E-DPCCH E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has switched to the target TTI, wherein the forbidden E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or for transmitting a separate carrying non-zero transmission A Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) of the Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • DPCCH Physical Control Channel
  • TFCI Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a second sending unit configured to: when the current ⁇ is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the sending carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to The user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
  • the sending carries an enhancement of the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH dedicated physical control channel
  • the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to perform uplink interference corresponding to the target
  • the code transmits control information or data to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
  • the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate the location The user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to: after receiving the switching indication information The acknowledgment information is sent to the base station in a maximum time, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the first sending unit is specifically configured to: when sending data to the base station by using the first ⁇ , the first sending unit After the second sending unit sends the next M subframes after the acknowledgement information, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero. ; or
  • the first sending unit sends the data to the second ⁇ after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgment information
  • the base station where N is predefined or configurable, and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, And before the first sending unit sends the data to the base station by using the target Clear the data in the HARQ buffer; reset the uplink enhancement (MAC-i/is) entity and set TSN to 0.
  • a processing unit And before the first sending unit sends the data to the base station by using the target Clear the data in the HARQ buffer; reset the uplink enhancement (MAC-i/is) entity and set TSN to 0.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, After the second receiving unit receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the data in the HARQ buffer is constructed as a MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI; and the MAC-i/is entity is reset. , set TSN to 0.
  • the first sending unit is specifically configured to: Deleting a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the ⁇ before the successful handover; constructing a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first In the MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; and the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ is transmitted.
  • the user equipment when in the first When the same TBS table is used, the user equipment further includes: a coding unit, configured to encode, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the first TTI that is not successfully sent into the first And corresponding to the second data, and sending the second data to the first sending unit; the first sending unit is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit, and send the first Two data.
  • a coding unit configured to encode, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the first TTI that is not successfully sent into the first And corresponding to the second data, and sending the second data to the first sending unit
  • the first sending unit is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit, and send the first Two data.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • the third sending unit is configured to send capability indication information that supports the handover.
  • the second receiving unit is specifically used Receiving the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
  • the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first , the second configuration information packet The second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI is included.
  • the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second UI
  • the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes The power of the control channel indicating the acknowledgment information, wherein the ⁇ handover indication acknowledgment information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the present invention further provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiver configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, and receive handover indication information sent by the base station, where the processor is configured to: according to the handover indication information, Switching to the target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current ⁇ is one of the first ⁇ and the second ,, and the target TTI is the first ⁇ and the second ⁇ Another one of the ;; a transmitter, configured to send data to the base station with the target ⁇ .
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to carry an E-TFCI that is forbidden in the E-DPCCH to indicate the location
  • the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or used to send a separate non-zero transport channel format merge indication (a physical control channel (DPCCH) of the TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • a separate non-zero transport channel format merge indication a physical control channel (DPCCH) of the TFCI
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to: when the current UI is 2 ms TTI, and the user equipment Sending a power headroom (UPH) value to the base station that is less than a first threshold, and transmitting an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate the The user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the sending carries an enhancement of the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH dedicated physical control channel
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to send control information or data by using an uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ,, To indicate that the switching indication information has been received.
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to use domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the The switching instruction information is described.
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to send the acknowledgement information within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information To the base station, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: When the first data is sent to the base station, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgement information is sent, where M is predefined or configurable. , M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; or
  • the second TTI is used to send data to the base station after the next N CFs are sent, where N is predefined or Configured, N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the processor is further configured to clear the HARQ buffer Data in the flush; and reset the uplink enhanced (MAC-i/is) entity, setting TSN to zero.
  • the processor is further configured to use the HARQ
  • the data in the cache is constructed as the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI; the MAC-i/is entity is reset, and the TSN is set to zero.
  • the processor is further configured to delete the unsent a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the TTI before the successful handover; constructing a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, wherein in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i In the PDU, the payload is the same; the transmitter is configured to send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ .
  • the user equipment further includes an encoder,
  • the first data corresponding to the ⁇ before the handover that is not successfully transmitted is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target ⁇ at the physical layer; the transmitter is configured to send the second data.
  • the transmitter is further configured to send Capability indication information that supports ⁇ switching.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
  • the first configuration information includes The first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first ⁇
  • the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
  • the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter corresponding to the first UI and/or a first
  • the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes Transmitting a power of a control channel including TTI handover indication acknowledgement information, where The confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • the first receiving unit is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, where the first sending unit is configured to send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment.
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the first sending unit is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within a maximum time, re Sending the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes:
  • a second receiving unit configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH user equipment Control channel
  • a processing unit configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or For confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • the base station further includes:
  • a second receiving unit configured to: when the current UI is 2ms ⁇ , and received by the base station The power headroom (UPH) value is less than the first threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) or The current ⁇ type is 10ms ⁇ , and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, and the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment is received.
  • E-DPCCH Enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • a processing unit configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a second sending unit And sending an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indication or an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication to the radio network controller.
  • MAC-i/is Reset uplink enhanced entity reset
  • MAC-is Reset uplink enhanced entity reset
  • the base station further includes: a third sending unit And transmitting, to the radio network controller, the switched target of the user equipment.
  • the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI handover
  • the first sending unit is configured to send the switching indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment in an working mode in which the base station is in the initiating TTI handover.
  • the base station further includes: a third receiving unit, configured to be in a working mode in which the base station is in the closed/switching mode Receiving the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and sending the indication information to the switching unit, where the switching unit is configured to switch the working mode of the base station by the shutdown switch based on the indication information.
  • the working mode for the said ⁇ switching is configured to switch the working mode of the base station by the shutdown switch based on the indication information.
  • the base station further includes: a fourth sending unit, configured to send, to the radio network controller, capability indication information that supports handover.
  • the base station further includes: a sending unit, configured to send indication information to the radio network controller, to enable the radio network controller to send the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTL after the handover
  • the indication information includes time information that is switched to the target ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • the receiver is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, and the transmitter is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
  • the first ⁇ is specifically 2 ms
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within a maximum time, re Sending the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a first processor,
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) for use by the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or, for receiving a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH separate physical control channel carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the first processor is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; Or for determining, according to the non-zero TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a first processor,
  • the receiver is further configured to: when the current TTI is a 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than a first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (E-TFCI)
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • E-DPCCH or, configured to: when the current ⁇ type is 10ms ⁇ , and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, and receive the second enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (E-TFCI)
  • E-TFCI second enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the first processor is configured to: confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, And confirming, by the second E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the network controller sends an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indicating an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication.
  • MAC-i/is Reset uplink enhanced entity reset
  • MAC-is Reset uplink enhanced entity reset
  • the transmitter is further configured to: The target of the switching of the user equipment is given to the radio network controller.
  • the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI handover. And the working mode of the ⁇ handover is performed, where the transmitter is specifically configured to: when the base station is in the working mode of enabling the TTI handover, send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment.
  • the receiver is configured to receive, when the base station is in the working mode of the off TTI handover, receive the sending by the radio network controller
  • the base station further includes a processor, configured to: switch the working mode of the base station from the closed switch to the working mode of the open switch.
  • the transmitter is used to send to a radio network controller Send capability indication information that supports handover.
  • the transmitter is used to control to a wireless network And transmitting the indication information, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
  • the indication information includes time information that is switched to the target ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a method for switching, comprising:
  • the user equipment receives the transmission time interval ( ⁇ ) handover indication information sent by the radio network controller; the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine the user equipment based on the transport format combination
  • the handover indication information has been received.
  • the user equipment sends a control channel carrying a combination of transmission formats, specifically:
  • the user equipment carries an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the user equipment sends a carrying
  • the control channel combination of the transmission format is specifically:
  • the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication ( An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the ⁇ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second a gain factor
  • the first gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends power of a control channel that does not include a handover indication acknowledgement
  • the second gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends a control that includes a handover indication acknowledgement The power of the channel; wherein the ⁇ handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the method further includes: the user equipment switching to the predefined or pre-configured time point
  • the switching indication information corresponds to a target ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a method for switching, comprising:
  • the base station receives a control channel that carries a combination of transmission formats sent by the user equipment, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the base station receives, by the user equipment, a control channel that carries a transport format combination, which is specifically:
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station receives, by the user equipment, a control channel that carries a transport format combination, which is specifically:
  • the base station When the current ⁇ of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the base station receives the first enhanced dedicated transport channel that is sent by the user equipment.
  • An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the format merge indication (E-TFCI) of the format merge indication (E-TFCI), and based on the first E-TFCI confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI Pre-defined or configurable; or,
  • the base station When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the base station receives a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment.
  • An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of (E-TFCI) and based on the second E-TFCI confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI is predefined Or configurable.
  • the receiving, by the base station, a control of a carrier transport format combination sent by a user equipment After the channel it also includes:
  • the base station starts to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target ⁇ at a predefined or pre-configured time point, where the target ⁇ corresponds to the handover indication information.
  • the ⁇ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, where the first gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends no ⁇ Switching the power of the control channel indicating the acknowledgment information, where the second gain factor is used to determine the power of the user equipment to transmit the control channel including the ⁇ handover indication acknowledgment information;
  • the ⁇ handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a transmission time interval ( ⁇ ) switching indication information sent by the radio network controller
  • a sending unit configured to send a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the sending unit is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI transport channel format merge indication
  • the sending unit is specifically configured to: when a current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and a power headroom UPH sent by the user equipment to the base station Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, if the value is smaller than the first threshold.
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH physical control channel
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to control, by the user equipment, to switch to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point The target TTI.
  • a processing unit configured to control, by the user equipment, to switch to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point The target TTI.
  • a receiver configured to receive a transmission time interval ( ⁇ ) switching indication message sent by the radio network controller
  • a transmitter configured to send a control channel carrying a transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI transport channel format merge indication
  • the transmitter is specifically configured to: when a current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and a power headroom UPH sent by the user equipment to the base station Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, if the value is smaller than the first threshold.
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH physical control channel
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to control, by the user equipment, to switch to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point The target TTI.
  • the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a first receiving unit configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the radio network controller
  • a second receiving unit configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the base station further includes a processing unit
  • the second receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH user equipment
  • the processing unit is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved Or, based on the TFCI, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • the base station further includes a processing unit
  • the second receiving unit is configured to: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, and receive the carrying by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); or, when the current frame of the user equipment is a 10 ms TTI, and the user equipment sends to the base station
  • the UPH value is greater than the second threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI);
  • the processing unit is configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a decoding unit, configured to start, by using a target TTI, the user equipment to send at a predefined or pre-configured time point Uplink data, the target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information.
  • the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a first receiver configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the radio network controller, where the second receiver is configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the Switch the indication information.
  • the base station further includes a processor, where the second receiver is specifically configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH user equipment
  • the processor is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. Or, based on the TFCI, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • the base station further includes a processor, where the second receiver is specifically configured to: when the current device of the user equipment is a 2 ms TTI, and the user equipment Receiving, by the user equipment, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI), where the power headroom UPH value sent to the base station is less than a first threshold; Or, when the current frame of the user equipment is a 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, receiving a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment ( Enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of E-TFCI);
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the processor configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes a decoder, And the uplink data sent by the user equipment is started to be decoded by the target ⁇ at a predefined or pre-configured time point, where the target ⁇ corresponds to the handover indication information.
  • the user equipment is pre-configured with a second TTI different from the first one and the first one, and the first configuration information corresponding to the first one and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, as long as receiving
  • the current TTI of the user equipment can be directly switched, and the target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by the target ,, so there is no need to be in the process of handover.
  • the RNC sends the new configuration information to the base station again, so that the signaling interaction between the RNC and the base station is not required. Therefore, the TTI handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so the 2ms TTI is avoided.
  • the OmsTTI is switched, the E-DCH data is lost or dropped, and the peak rate can be increased because the lOmsTTI can be switched to the 2ms TTI in time.
  • the seventh to twelfth aspects of the present invention provide that after the user equipment receives the handover indication information of the UI, the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine the user based on the transport format combination.
  • the device has received the handover indication information, so the base station can know the timing of the user equipment switching the TTI, and then can know when to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, so the base station does not need to
  • the hardware resources of the base station are saved by attempting to parse the two types of ⁇ before and after the handover. Therefore, the method in the embodiment of the present invention can save hardware resources of the base station.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a method for handover of a UE on a UE side according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of transmitting data by a target ⁇ according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a method for handover of a base station on a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of an interaction method of T ⁇ handover according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of hardware implementation of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a functional block diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic conceptual diagram of a hardware implementation of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an interaction method of a handover according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a functional block diagram of a user equipment according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a hardware implementation of a user equipment according to another embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic conceptual diagram of a hardware implementation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
  • An embodiment of the present invention provides a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment.
  • the user equipment end and the base station end are pre-configured with a second UI different from the current first one. Therefore, the RNC does not need to be in the process of handover. Then, the new configuration information is sent to the base station, so that there is no need to perform multiple signaling interactions between the RNC and the base station. Therefore, in this embodiment, the handover can be triggered by the base station, so the handover process in this embodiment.
  • the delay is small, so E-DCH data loss or dropped calls are avoided when the 2ms TTI is switched to lOmsTTI, and the peak rate can be increased because the switching of lOmsTTI to 2ms TTI can be performed in time.
  • the user equipment may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal, and the wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, a handheld device with wireless connection function, or even Receive other processing devices from the wireless modem.
  • the wireless terminal can be accessed via a wireless access network (eg,
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • core networks may be mobile terminals, such as mobile phones (or “cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminals, for example, may be portable, pocket-sized , handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with a wireless access network.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • a wireless terminal may also be called a system, a Subscriber Unit, a Subscriber Station, a Mobile Station, a Mobile, a Remote Station, an Access Point, Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, User Agent, User Device, or User Equipment.
  • a base station can refer to a device in an access network that communicates with a wireless terminal over one or more sectors over an air interface.
  • the base station can be used to convert the received air frame to the IP packet as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network, wherein the remainder of the access network can include an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the base station can also coordinate attribute management of the air interface.
  • the base station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or may be an evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) This application is not limited.
  • the base station controller may be a base station controller (BSC) in CDMA or a radio network controller (RNC) in WCDMA, which is not limited in this application.
  • BSC base station controller
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Embodiment 1 Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for switching, and the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 101 The user equipment receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI.
  • the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI, that is, the first TTI and the second ⁇ are both E under E-DCH.
  • the first ⁇ and the second ⁇ may also belong to ⁇ in different protocol versions, for example, the first l is lOmsTTI in E-DCH, and the second 20 is 20ms TTI in R99 DCH.
  • the step 101 is specifically: the user equipment receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI that are sent by the RNC.
  • the RNC may send the resource configuration information corresponding to the first ⁇ and the second ⁇ to the UE by using dedicated RRC signaling.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information may also be predefined, that is, the method of RNC configuration is preferred, and the RNC configuration is taken as an example.
  • the process of the RNC sending the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the UE may be the same or not, and correspondingly, in step 101, the UE receives the configuration information and the corresponding information corresponding to the first TTI.
  • the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI may or may not be simultaneous.
  • the first TTI is 2msTTI and the second TTI is lOmsTTI, for example, at the initial
  • the RNC pre-configures the lOmsTTI information (here, the UE's current frame is 2msTTI) to the UE.
  • the RNC determines the pre-configured lOmsTTI information based on the 6a event (here, the current UE of the UE is 2msTTI) to the UE, where the 6a event is that the total transmit power of the UE is greater than a preset threshold, then the UE reports the total The transmit power to the RNC, then the RNC can pre-configure the lOmsTTI information to the UE according to the 6a event decision.
  • the 6a event here, the current UE of the UE is 2msTTI
  • the RNC when the RNC is transmitting the first configuration information and the second configuration information at the same time, the ⁇ type currently used by the UE is also specified. In general, to prevent dropped calls, the RNC specifies that the UE currently using ⁇ is 10msTTI.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information sent by the RNC respectively include a set of enhanced dedicated channel media access control flow (E-DCH MAC-d flow) parameters corresponding to each TTI, for example, based on the E-DCH MAC.
  • E-DCH MAC-d flow enhanced dedicated channel media access control flow
  • -d flow Identity E-DCH MAC-d flow maximum number of retransmissions
  • ACK positive acknowledgement
  • NACK negative acknowledgment
  • E-DPCCH/DPCCH power offset the power offset of the data channel and the control channel
  • the second configuration information includes the second ⁇ corresponding second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter; further, may further include other parameters, for example, configuring a set of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) parameters and/or for the first TTI and the second TTI
  • the DRX discontinuous Reception parameter is not limited in this application.
  • the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes, but is not limited to, a power for determining to transmit a control channel including the handover indication acknowledgement information.
  • the TTI handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the UE before the step 101, also reports the capability indication information that supports the TTI handover to the RNC.
  • the UE may report the capability indication information in the RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message. .
  • Step 102 The user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station.
  • the base station notifies the UE to perform the handover by physical signaling, for example, notifying the UE to perform the TTI handover by using the HS-SCCH order.
  • the handover indication information may also be sent to the UE through another physical signaling or non-physical signaling. How the base station decides when to send the handover indication information, and what handover indication information is sent, and how to transmit the handover indication information by using the High Speed Shared Control Channel Command (HS-SCCH order), which will be described later on the base station side. In the case, a detailed description will be made.
  • HS-SCCH order High Speed Shared Control Channel Command
  • the handover indication may be used to indicate that the UE is in the R99 DCH and the E-DCH. Switching is performed between, but the present invention is described by taking an example of switching between E-DCH TTIs.
  • Step 103 The user equipment switches the current ⁇ to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the target TTI is the first TTI or the second TTI. That is, if the user equipment's ⁇ is the first ⁇ before the handover, the target ⁇ is the second TTI, and if the user equipment's ⁇ is the second TTI before the handover, the target ⁇ is the first TTI.
  • Step 104 The user equipment sends data to the base station with the target ⁇ .
  • step 104 is specifically to send uplink data to the base station by lOmsTTI.
  • step 104 has various embodiments, which will be described in detail later.
  • the user equipment first receives the corresponding configuration information of different TTIs, and then after receiving the handover indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment can be directly switched and switched to The target ⁇ corresponding to the indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by using the target TTI. Therefore, the RNC does not need to send new configuration information to the base station during the handover process, so that multiple times between the RNC and the base station are not required.
  • the TTI handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so that the E-DCH data is lost or dropped when the 2ms TTI is switched to the lOmsTTI, and because the lOmsTTI is switched to the 2ms TTI in time, Can increase the peak rate.
  • the user equipment does not send the acknowledgement information to the base station, and the base station can ensure that the user equipment receives the retransmission handover indication information, specifically by setting the time period of retransmission or the number of retransmissions, for example, The instruction information is continuously retransmitted within Is, or continuously retransmitted 3 times.
  • the user equipment After receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment immediately performs step 103 and step 104.
  • the base station sends the handover indication information, the base station uses two sets of resources to parse the E-DCH sent by the user equipment by using 2ms TTI and 10msTTI respectively. Upstream data.
  • the handover method further includes the step 105: the user equipment sends the acknowledgement information to the base station to notify the base station that the user equipment has received or The handover indication information is not received.
  • step 105 the user equipment feeds back ACK (Acknowledgment Positive Acknowledgement) information or NACK (Negative Acknowledge Negative Acknowledgement) information to the base station. If the handover indication information is correctly received, the user equipment sends an ACK message to the base station. If the handover indication information is not correctly received, the user equipment sends a NACK message to the base station.
  • ACK Acknowledgment Positive Acknowledgement
  • NACK Negative Acknowledge Negative Acknowledgement
  • the user equipment carries an E-TFCH (E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the E-DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • E-TFCH E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator
  • the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. For example, it can be configured through RNC, for example, using the 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS (Transport Block Size) table.
  • the E-TFCI is reserved and cannot be used for normal data transmission. It is only used to indicate that the user correctly receives the handover indication information.
  • the user equipment sends data or control information by using a UL (Uplink) scrambling code corresponding to the target ⁇ to indicate that the handover indication information has been correctly received.
  • a UL Uplink
  • the RNC pre-configures the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the user equipment
  • two SUM codes SC1 and SC2 are configured for the two ⁇ respectively; and the 2ms TTI is switched to the lOmsTTI as an example, when the UE correctly receives
  • the uplink DPCCH is sent by SC2, and after detecting by the base station, the E-DCH is parsed using the target TTI.
  • the serving base station After the HS-SCCH order is sent, two sets of resources need to be used to separately parse the uplink DPCCH according to SC1 and SC2.
  • the user equipment uses the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has correctly received the handover indication information.
  • the bit corresponding to the FBI can be used to indicate.
  • the user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is a pre- Defined, or configurable.
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DCH 10ms in which the TFCI field in the DPCCH is 0; when the UE receives the handover indication information (E-DCH 10ms ⁇ switch to DCH 10ms ⁇ handover indication information), then send a separate DPCCH carrying non-zero TFCI to instruct the UE to receive handover indication information; if the corresponding base station detects that the TFCI in the DPCCH is non-zero, the UE is considered as The handover indication information is correctly received, and the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the separate transmission referred to herein refers to the DPCCH channel being separately transmitted, and there is no accompanying dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) channel transmission.
  • DPDCH dedicated physical data channel
  • the user equipment before the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment further sends a power headroom (UPH) to the base station, for example, when the user equipment is UPH. If the threshold is lower than the first threshold, the user equipment reports the UPH to the base station.
  • UPH power headroom
  • the step 105 is specifically: when the current location of the user equipment is an E-DCH 2ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication.
  • E-TFCI an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the user equipment When the ⁇ type used by the user equipment is E-DCH 2ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends the first indication after receiving the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to the 10ms TTI.
  • the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; it should be noted that when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the user is in power Limiting or covering the restricted state, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a higher rate, that is, it is generally considered that the E-TFCI value is smaller at this time; therefore, when the UE receives the E-DCH 2ms switch to the 10ms TTI switching indication After the information is sent, the E-DPCCH carrying the first E-TFCI (the first E-TFCI value is large) is sent, and the base station can be instructed to receive the handover indication information correctly.
  • the base station After transmitting the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to 10ms E, the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI of the larger value (ie, the first E-TFCI), Then, it is considered that the UE receives the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to 10 ms.
  • the first E-TFCI can be used for E-DCH data transmission, but when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the UE does not select the first E-TFCI for E-DCH data transmission, so the UE can use the first E. - TFCI to indicate the handover indication information sent by the base station.
  • the ⁇ type used by the user equipment is the E-DCH 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is greater than the second threshold
  • the user equipment after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment sends the E-DPCCH carrying the second E-TFCI, to indicate that the handover indication information has been received, the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable. It should be noted that when the UPH is greater than the second threshold, it indicates that the user is in the near-point or mid-point of the cell. At this time, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a smaller rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be larger at this time.
  • the E-DPCCH carrying the second E-TFCI (the second E-TFCI value is smaller than the first E-TFCI) is sent.
  • the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI with a smaller value, and considers that the UE receives the E-DCH 10ms and switches to the TTI of 2ms. Switch messages.
  • the user equipment sends the acknowledgement information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined. Or configurable. For example, if the RNC configures a maximum time for the user equipment, the user equipment feeds back the confirmation information to the base station within the maximum time.
  • step 104 from the timing of step 104, if the target device is the first frame, for example, 2 ms TTI, when the user equipment sends data to the base station in the first TTI, the user The device sends data to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgment message is sent, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; and if the target ⁇ is the second TTI, for example In the case of lOmsTTI, when the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the second TTI, the user equipment sends the data to the base station after the next N CFNs after the acknowledgement information is sent, where N is predefined or configurable, N Is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • M and N are configurable, for example, configured by the RNC to the user equipment, and are predefined as A fixed value in the protocol.
  • step 104 there are various embodiments of the step 104 in terms of the manner of processing to the user plane.
  • the user equipment first clears the data in the HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) buffer before the step 104; the user equipment resets the uplink enhancement (MAC-i) /is) entity.
  • the MAC-i/is entity is reset, for example, the variable TSN (Transmission Sequence Number) of the MAC layer is reset to 0.
  • TSN Transmission Sequence Number
  • the RLC (Radio Link Control) layer on the user equipment side does not receive the RLC ACK sent by the network side, and then it is reconstructed in the RLC buffer.
  • the uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU), and the MAC-is/MAC-i PDU is retransmitted, that is, step 104 is performed.
  • the uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication or the uplink enhanced entity weight is required to be carried in the E-DCH FP (Frame Protocol) or signaling.
  • Set (MAC-i/is Reset) indication is required to be carried in the E-DCH FP (Frame Protocol) or signaling.
  • the user equipment deletes the first uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the pre-switched TTI that is not successfully transmitted; the user equipment constructs the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ,, The payload is the same in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU; the user equipment sends the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ .
  • MAC-i PDU first uplink enhanced protocol data unit
  • the ⁇ before handover is 2 ms TTI
  • the target TTI is 10 ms TTI
  • the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the 2 ms TTI that has not been successfully transmitted is deleted, and the MAC corresponding to the 10 ms TTI is constructed.
  • -i PDU but the payload remains the same as 2msTTI, but in order to match the 10ms TTI TBS table, padding bits need to be filled in.
  • the payload of the 2ms TTI is assumed to be 160 bits, but in order to match the TBS table of lOmsTTI, it is assumed that the payload of the TBS table of lOmsTTI is 166 bits, then the second MAC The -i PDU fills in the padding, which is 6bit, but the payload is still 160bit.
  • the TSN does not reset and remains consistent with the 2msTTI. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to trigger retransmission of the RLC layer.
  • step 104 the user equipment is not successfully sent before the physical layer switches.
  • the first data corresponding to the TTI is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target ;; the user equipment sends the second data.
  • the MAC-i PDU of the 2ms TTI that has not been successfully transmitted is not deleted, but is encoded and encoded into the lOmsTTI at the physical layer.
  • the method requires that the first TTI and the second TTI use the same TBS table.
  • the TSN does not reset and remains consistent with the 2msTTI.
  • the method in this embodiment does not require triggering RLC layer retransmission.
  • step 104 after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment does not clear the data in the HARQ buffer, constructs the MAC-i PDU according to the target TTI type, and sends the data to the base station according to the target TTI type, and sends the MAC address to the base station; -i/is entity, reset TSN to 0.
  • the MAC-is reset indication or the MAC-i/is reset indication needs to be carried in the E-DCH FP (Frame Protocol) or signaling.
  • the user equipment processes the information to the user plane: after receiving the handover indication information, the new MAC-i PDU is not constructed, and the existing HARQ buffer is not cleared. The data in the area; when the data transmission in the existing HARQ buffer is completed, the user equipment sends the confirmation information of the handover indication information; the user equipment switches to the lOmsTTI after the next CF after the confirmation information is sent; The next CF after the confirmation message is considered to switch to 10msTTI. That is, as described above, the user equipment side is predefined or configured with a maximum time during which the user equipment transmits the data in the HARQ buffer in the maximum time, and then sends an acknowledgement message to the base station.
  • the method for switching from the base station side is described. Referring to FIG. 4, the method includes:
  • Step 201 The base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first port and the second configuration information corresponding to the second port.
  • the step 201 is specifically: the base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first ⁇ sent by the RNC and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI.
  • RNC can be wireless
  • the link reconfiguration process sends the resource configuration information corresponding to the first ⁇ and the second ⁇ to the base station.
  • the step 201 is similar to the step 101.
  • the process of the RNC sending the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the base station may be the same or not. For details, refer to the description of step 101. .
  • the ⁇ type currently used by the UE is also specified.
  • the RNC specifies the current UE.
  • the ⁇ used is 10msTTI.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information sent by the RNC respectively include a set of E-DCH MAC-d flow parameters corresponding to each TTI, that is, a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ; further, other parameters may be included, for example, a set of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) is configured for the first TTI and the second TTI, respectively.
  • DTX Discontinuous Transmission
  • DRX discontinuous Reception
  • the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information includes, but is not limited to, determining, by the user equipment, the power of the control channel that includes the handover indication acknowledgement information, where the handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received Switch the indication information.
  • the base station before the step 201, also reports the capability indication information for supporting the TTI handover to the RNC.
  • the base station may report the capability indication information in the Audit Response message.
  • Step 202 The base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment, so that the user equipment can perform step 103.
  • the base station notifies the UE to perform a TTI handover through physical signaling, for example, notifying the UE to perform the handover by using the HS-SCCH order.
  • the handover indication information may also be sent to the UE through other physical signaling or non-physical signaling.
  • the HS-SCCH order can be triggered by the serving E-DCH cell of the user equipment in the E-DCH RLS set.
  • the method before the step 202, further includes: determining, by the base station, whether the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, and obtaining a first determination result; when the first determination result indicates that the user equipment needs to perform handover, the base station generates a handover indication. information.
  • the base station determines whether the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, which can be implemented in various ways.
  • the UPH is lower than the first threshold, and/or the uplink data rate (or the current E-TFCI selected by the user equipment) is lower than the second threshold. If the UPH is lower than the first threshold, and/or the uplink data rate (or the E-TFCI selected by the current TTI user equipment) is lower than the second threshold, it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, and triggers switching from 2msTTI to lOmsTTI. .
  • the base station counts whether the number of UPHs reported by the user equipments in the X Y are lower than the third threshold, where Y and ⁇ are both greater than or equal to 1
  • the integer is ⁇ less than or equal to ⁇ ; and/or the uplink data rate (or the current E-TFCI selected by the user equipment) is lower than the second threshold; if there are X ⁇ , the UPH reported by the user equipment is low.
  • the uplink data rate (or the E-TFCI selected by the current user equipment) is lower than the second threshold, it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the handover of 2ms TTI to 10msTTI.
  • the first threshold and the third threshold may be the same or different.
  • the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the lOmsTTI to 2msTTI. Switch.
  • the base station counts whether the UPHs reported by the user equipments in the S ⁇ are higher than the sixth threshold, where S and P are both greater than or equal to 1.
  • the integer value, P is less than or equal to S, and/or the TEBS reported by the user equipment is higher than the fifth threshold. If the number of UPHs reported by the user equipment in the P-TTIs is higher than the sixth threshold, and/or the user equipment reports The TEBS is higher than the fifth threshold, then it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the handover of lOmsTTI to 2msTTI.
  • the fourth threshold and the sixth threshold may be the same or different.
  • the first threshold and the fourth threshold may be the same or different
  • the third threshold and the sixth threshold may be the same or different.
  • the base station may also determine whether to perform the handover by using other parameters or algorithms, which is not limited in this application.
  • the base station decides to perform the handover, the handover indication information is generated, and then the steps are performed.
  • the method further comprises the step 203: the base station receiving the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the acknowledgment information received by the eNB in step 203 corresponds to the acknowledgment information sent by the user equipment, and the acknowledgment information is described in detail in the foregoing method in the first embodiment, and is not described here.
  • the handover indication information is resent, that is, the step 202 is repeatedly performed, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable, for example, the RNC configures the base station with a maximum time. Then, the base station feeds back the confirmation information to the base station within the maximum time.
  • the maximum time that the RNC is configured for the user equipment and the maximum time configured for the base station are the same.
  • the method further comprises the step 204: the base station sends a MAC-i/is Reset indication or a MAC-is Reset indication to the RNC, so that the RNC sets the TSN to 0.
  • the party The method further includes the step 205: the base station sends the switched target TTI of the user equipment to the RNC.
  • the RNC user device can be indicated by FP frame or signaling (such as RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION or RADIO LINK PARAMETER UPDATE INDICATION).
  • the method further comprises: parsing the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target ⁇ .
  • the RNC is allowed to turn off the handover mode triggered by the base station, and then the RNC controls the handover of the TTI, for example, in the user equipment.
  • the base station is notified to turn off the base station triggered TTI handover. Therefore, the base station has an operation mode for turning off the TTI handover and an operation mode for turning on the TTI handover, and in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover, step 202 is performed.
  • the base station receives the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and switches the working mode of the base station from the TTI switch-off to the operation mode of the switch-on, or switches the work mode of the base station from the switch to the switch mode. .
  • the RNC has, but is not limited to, the following two types of indication information: The first type is indicated by reconfiguring the related configuration information with or without the pre-configured message; the second type is by re-allocating the message. A display switch indication is added. When the TTI switching mode of the base station is to be turned off, the configuration information of the provisioning port may not be deleted.
  • the RNC instructs the base station to turn off the TTI switch by RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST/Response.
  • the base station is in RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION
  • the Response feeds back the target ⁇ type currently used by the user device.
  • the method further includes: transmitting, by the base station, indication information to the radio network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station Switch to the target TTI after switching.
  • the indication information includes time information switched to the target ⁇ .
  • Step 301 The UE and the base station report the capability indication for supporting the handover to the RNC.
  • Step 302 RNC side decision pre-matching ⁇
  • Step 303 The UE and the base station initially configure the 2ms TTI configuration parameter, and pre-configure the lOmsTTI configuration parameter.
  • Step 304 The base station determines to trigger the 2ms TTI to switch to lOmsTTI;
  • Step 305 The base station sends an HS-SCCH order trigger switch.
  • Step 306 The UE performs a handover
  • Step 307 The UE feeds back confirmation information to the base station.
  • Step 308 The base station sends a MAC-is reset indication to the RNC. Optionally, it may also be a sending or MAC-i/is Reset indication.
  • Step 309 The base station feeds back to the RNC the currently used TTI.
  • Step 310 The RNC decides to disable the TTI handover triggered by the base station.
  • Step 311 The RNC notifies the base station to turn off the handover
  • Step 312 The base station is turned off, and optionally, the current used TTI is also fed back to the RNC; Step 313: The RNC controls the handover.
  • steps 301 to 312 are described in detail in the second embodiment of the first embodiment, and therefore are not described here.
  • step 313 refer to the method flow in FIG.
  • the RNC may perform the handover and send the handover indication information to the base station.
  • the base station sends the handover indication information to the UE in the foregoing manner, and the subsequent steps are the same as the foregoing solution.
  • the scheme has the beneficial effects of reducing the signaling interaction between the base station and the RNC side.
  • the RNC notifies the base station to perform TTI handover through the RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE, the RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready, and the Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm.
  • a signaling is required to inform the base station to perform a handover. Therefore, the technical problem that the switching delay is large in the prior art can also be solved.
  • the RNC can simultaneously notify the non-serving base station in the E-DCH RLS set to perform TTI handover.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a user equipment.
  • the user equipment includes: a first receiving unit 401, configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and corresponding to the second UI
  • the second receiving unit 402 is configured to receive the switching indication information sent by the base station, and send the switching indication information to the switching unit 403.
  • the switching unit 403 is configured to receive the switching indication information from the second receiving unit 402.
  • the current ⁇ is switched to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target TTI is another one of the first TTI and the second TTI; the first sending unit 404 , used to send data to the base station with the target TTI.
  • the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
  • the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to send the acknowledgement information to the base station.
  • the second sending unit is specifically configured to feed back ACK information or NACK information to the base station.
  • the second sending unit is specifically configured to carry the E-TFCI that is prohibited from being used in the E-DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the target TTI, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or Configured or reserved; or
  • DPCCH Physical Control Channel
  • TFCI Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the second sending unit is specifically configured to send the control information or data by using the uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target , to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
  • the second sending unit is specifically configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the second sending unit is configured to: when the current UI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and the sending carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format.
  • the enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E -DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the second sending unit is specifically configured to send the acknowledgment information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to: when transmitting data to the base station by using the first TTI, the first sending unit 404 sends the first frame after the next M subframes after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgement information.
  • Data to the base station where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero;
  • the first sending unit 404 sends the data to the base station by using the second ⁇ after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgment information, where N is predefined or configurable. , N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the next M subframes can use 2msTTI to send data to the base station; if the target ⁇ is the second ⁇ , that is, lOmsTTI, then it is switched from 2msTTI to lOmsTTI, so the next N CFs after the confirmation message is sent, for example, the next CF
  • the data can then be sent to the base station using 1 OmsTTI.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to: before the first sending unit 404 sends the data to the base station by using the target TTI, clear the data in the HARQ buffer; and reset the MAC-i/is entity.
  • the MAC-i/is entity is reset, for example, the variable TSN (Transmission Sequence Number) of the MAC layer is reset to 0.
  • TSN Transmission Sequence Number
  • the RLC Radio Link Control
  • the standard TTI transmits data to the base station.
  • the first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to: delete a first M AC-i PDU corresponding to a TTI that is not successfully transmitted before the handover; and construct a second M AC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where In the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; and the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI is transmitted.
  • the user equipment when the same TBS table is used under the first frame and the second frame, the user equipment further includes: a coding unit, configured to correspond to the first TTI that is not successfully sent in the physical layer.
  • the first data is encoded as the second data corresponding to the second frame, and the second data is sent to the first sending unit 404.
  • the first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit and send the second data.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to, after the second receiving unit 402 receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, construct the data in the HARQ buffer as the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ ; and reset the MAC-i/is entity, setting TSN to 0.
  • a processing unit configured to, after the second receiving unit 402 receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, construct the data in the HARQ buffer as the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ⁇ ; and reset the MAC-i/is entity, setting TSN to 0.
  • the user equipment further includes: a third sending unit, configured to send capability indication information that supports the handover.
  • a third sending unit configured to send capability indication information that supports the handover.
  • the third sending unit sends the capability indication information supporting the handover to the RNC.
  • the second receiving unit 402 is specifically configured to receive the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station, that is, the handover indication information is represented by an HS-SCCH order.
  • the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ⁇ .
  • the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
  • the first receiving unit 401 and the second receiving unit 402 may be the same one, or may be different receiving units; and the first sending unit 404 to the third sending unit may It is the same sending unit, and it can also be a sending unit that is different from each other.
  • FIG. 7 a conceptual diagram of an example implementation of hardware of a user equipment, where the user equipment includes:
  • the receiver 503 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, and receive the handover indication information sent by the base station, where the processor 501 is configured to: according to the handover indication information, Switching to a target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first ⁇ and the second ,, the target ⁇ is the other of the first ⁇ and the second ;; the transmitter 504 is configured to target ⁇ Send data to the base station.
  • bus 500 can include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, and bus 500 will include one or more processors and memory 502 represented by processor 501.
  • the various circuits of the memory are linked together.
  • the bus 500 can also link various other circuits such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and, therefore, will not be further described herein.
  • Bus interface 505 provides an interface between bus 500 and receiver 503, transmitter 504.
  • Receiver 503 and transmitter 504 may be the same component, i.e., a transceiver, providing means for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium.
  • a user interface 506 can also be provided, such as a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick.
  • the processor 501 is responsible for managing the bus 500 and the usual processing, and the memory 502 can be used to store data used by the processor 501 when performing operations.
  • the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
  • the transmitter 504 is further configured to send an acknowledgement message to the base station.
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to feed back ACK information or NACK information to the base station.
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to: in the E-DPCCH, carry the forbidden E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or Configured or reserved; or used to transmit a separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
  • DPCCH Physical Control Channel
  • TFCI Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to: when the current TTI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, the sending carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) indicating (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
  • the enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E -DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to send control information or data with an uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ⁇ to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to send the acknowledgment information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the transmitter 504 is further configured to:
  • the data When the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgement information is sent, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is greater than or equal to zero. Integer
  • the data When the data is sent to the base station by the second frame, the data is sent to the base station by using the second frame after the next CF is sent, where ⁇ is predefined or configurable, and ⁇ is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the processor 501 is further configured to clear data in the HARQ buffer; and reset the MAC-i/is entity to set the TSN to zero.
  • the processor 501 is further configured to construct the data in the HARQ buffer as the target MAC-i PDU; reset the MAC-i/is entity, and set the TSN to 0.
  • the processor 501 is further configured to delete the first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the ⁇ before the successful handover, and construct the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where the second MAC-i PDU is in the second MAC-i PDU. And in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; the transmitter 504 is configured to send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI.
  • the user equipment further includes an encoder, coupled to the processor 501, for encoding, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the target before the unsuccessful handover is the second data corresponding to the target ;; Send the second data.
  • an encoder coupled to the processor 501, for encoding, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the target before the unsuccessful handover is the second data corresponding to the target ;; Send the second data.
  • the transmitter 504 is further configured to send capability indication information that supports TTI handover.
  • the receiver 503 is further configured to receive the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
  • the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ⁇ .
  • the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI
  • the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
  • a base station is provided. As shown in FIG. 8, the base station includes:
  • the first receiving unit 601 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI.
  • the first sending unit 602 is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
  • the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
  • the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the first sending unit 602 is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within the maximum time, retransmit the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) that is prohibited by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or a physical control channel (DPCCH) for receiving a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment, and a processing unit, configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where The used E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, for confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable .
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to: when the current frame is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated transmission sent by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the channel format combining indication (E-TFCI) or for when the current ⁇ type is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, receiving An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carried by the user equipment carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI);
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-TFCI second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the base station further includes: a second sending unit, configured to send to the radio network controller
  • the base station further includes: a third sending unit, configured to send the switched target TTI of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
  • the base station has an operation mode of turning off the handover and an operation mode of the on/off handover
  • the first sending unit 602 is specifically configured to send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover mode.
  • the base station further includes: a third receiving unit, configured to: receive the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and send the indication information to the switching unit, in the working mode in which the base station is in the closed/switching mode; The working mode in which the base station is switched from being turned off is switched to the operating mode in which the switching is started based on the indication information.
  • a third receiving unit configured to: receive the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and send the indication information to the switching unit, in the working mode in which the base station is in the closed/switching mode; The working mode in which the base station is switched from being turned off is switched to the operating mode in which the switching is started based on the indication information.
  • the base station further includes: a fourth sending unit, configured to send capability indication information supporting the handover to the radio network controller.
  • the base station further includes: a fifth sending unit, configured to send the indication information to the wireless network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
  • a fifth sending unit configured to send the indication information to the wireless network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
  • it can be applied to a soft switching area.
  • the indication information includes time information for switching to the target ⁇ .
  • the first receiving unit 601 to the third receiving unit may be the same one, or may be two different receiving units; and the first sending unit 602 to the fifth sending unit may be the same sending unit. It can also be a sending unit that is different from each other.
  • a base station is provided. Please refer to FIG. 9, which is a block diagram of a hardware implementation example of a base station.
  • the base station includes:
  • the receiver 701 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI.
  • the transmitter 702 is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
  • transmit processor 705 can receive data from a data source and receive control information from processor 704. Transmit processor 705 provides various signal processing functions for the data, control information, and reference signals, for example, transmit processor 705 can encode. Transmit processor 705 provides the generated symbols to transmit frame processor 430 to create a frame structure resulting in a series of frames. These frames are then provided to a transmitter 702 which provides various signal conditioning functions including amplification, filtering, and modulating the frame onto a carrier for transmission over the wireless medium via antenna 703.
  • the receiver 701 receives the data through the antenna 703 and processes the data to restore the information modulated onto the carrier, and the information recovered by the receiver 701 is supplied to the receiving frame processor 709, which parses each frame, and the receiving processor 710 The frame is decoded and the successfully decoded control signal is provided to the processor 704. If some frames are not successfully decoded by the receive processor 710, the processor 704 can also support those frames using the ACK and/or NACK protocols. Retransmission request.
  • the processor 704 can provide various functions including timing, peripheral interfaces, voltage regulation, power management, and other control functions.
  • Memory 707 can be used to store data and software for the base station.
  • the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI
  • the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
  • the receiver 701 is further configured to: receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
  • the transmitter 702 is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within the maximum time, retransmit the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes: a first processor, where the receiver 701 is further configured to: receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication that is prohibited by the user equipment from being carried in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) ( E-TFCI); or, for receiving a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment; the first processor is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received based on the E-TFCI Handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, for confirming the user based on the non-zero TFCI The device has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • DPCCH separate physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the base station further includes: a first processor, where the receiver 701 is further configured to: when the current TTI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, and the receiving user equipment sends An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combining indication (E-TFCI) or for the current ⁇ type of 10 ms ⁇ , and the power headroom received by the base station (UPH) And the value is greater than the second threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); the first processor is configured to: be based on the first E-TFCI Confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, for confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI
  • the transmitter 702 is further configured to: send a MAC-i/is Reset indication or a MAC-is Reset indication to the radio network controller.
  • the transmitter 702 is further configured to: send the switched target of the user equipment to the wireless network controller.
  • the base station has an operation mode of turning off the handover and an operation mode of enabling the handover
  • the transmitter 702 is specifically configured to: send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover.
  • the receiver 701 is configured to receive the indication information sent by the radio network controller in the working mode in which the base station is in the off-hook mode; the base station further includes a processor 704, configured to: switch the working mode of the base station from the closed port to the on mode. ⁇ Switching mode of operation.
  • the transmitter 702 is configured to send the capability indication information supporting the handover to the radio network controller.
  • the transmitter 702 is configured to send indication information to the wireless network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTL after the handover.
  • the indication information includes time information for switching to the target TTI.
  • the user device is pre-configured with a second TTI different from the first TTI, and the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, as long as receiving
  • the current TTI of the user equipment can be directly switched, and the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by the target , so there is no need to be in the process of handover.
  • the RNC sends the new configuration information to the base station again, so that the signaling interaction between the RNC and the base station is not required. Therefore, the handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so the 2ms TTI is avoided.
  • the OmsTTI is switched, the E-DCH data is lost or dropped, and the peak rate can be increased because the lOmsTTI can be switched to the 2ms TTI in time.
  • the TTI handover may be triggered by the base station controller (RNC) for asynchronous reconfiguration.
  • RNC base station controller
  • FIG. 10 it is a flowchart of a method for switching between an RNC, a base station, and a UE.
  • the method includes:
  • Step 801 The RNC sends TTI handover indication information to the UE and the base station.
  • Step 802 The UE receives the handover indication information sent by the RNC.
  • Step 803 The base station receives the handover indication information sent by the RNC.
  • Step 804 The UE sends a control channel carrying a transport format combination for the handover indication acknowledgement to the base station;
  • Step 805 The base station receives a control channel that is sent by the UE and carries a combination of transmission formats for the handover indication acknowledgement.
  • Step 806 The UE switches to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point;
  • Step 807 The base station decodes the uplink data sent by the UE by using the target at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
  • Step 808 The UE sends a handover complete message to the RNC with the target ⁇ .
  • the user equipment side is taken as an example, the method for the handover includes: step 802, step 804, and further, step 806; further, step 808 may be further included.
  • the eighth embodiment that is, taking the base station side as an example, the handover method includes: Step 803, step 805, and further, step 807 is further included.
  • the RNC sends the handover indication information to the UE and the base station.
  • the handover indication information sent by the RNC to the UE may be a radio bearer setup message (RADIO BEARER SETUP) or a radio bearer reconfiguration message (RADIO BEARER) RECONFIGURATION or Transport CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION
  • the TTI handover indication message sent by the RNC to the base station may be a radio link reconfiguration message (RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST).
  • the handover indication message is used to indicate that the UE switches from the E-DCH 2ms TTI to the E-DCH 10ms TTI, or is used to indicate that the UE switches from the E-DCH 10ms TTI to the E-DCH 2ms TTI, or is used to indicate the UE. Switch from the E-DCH 10ms TTI to the R99 DCH channel.
  • the TTI handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, where the first gain factor is used to determine a power of the control channel when the user equipment sends the handover indication confirmation information that is not included, for example, to determine the accompanying transmission.
  • the advantage that the at least two gain factors are included in the handover indication information is that, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information, the control channel carrying the transmission format combination of the handover indication acknowledgement information is transmitted with greater power, so that the base station is correct.
  • the control channel is decoded to determine when the user equipment switches to the target ⁇ .
  • step 802 is performed, that is, the radio network controller RNC is sent. Switch the indication information.
  • step 803 is performed, that is, the TTI handover indication information sent by the radio network controller RNC is received.
  • the steps 802 and 803 may be performed at the same time, or may be performed at different times, depending on the communication status of the communication network.
  • the UE performs step 804 to transmit a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transport format combination.
  • step 804 has multiple implementation manners, which are specifically illustrated as follows:
  • step 804 is specifically for carrying an enhanced dedicated transport channel format that is prohibited from being used in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH).
  • the merge indication indicates that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved.
  • the RNC for example, using the E-TFCL in the 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS (Transport Block Size) table.
  • the E-TFCI is reserved and cannot be used for normal data.
  • the transmission is only used to instruct the user to correctly receive the handover indication information.
  • E-TFCI Transmission Block Size
  • the user equipment sends a separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • DPCCH Physical Control Channel
  • TFCI Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the TFCI in the DPCCH is 0 because there is no R99 service; when the UE receives the handover indication information ( The E-DCH 10ms TTI is switched to the DCH 10ms TTI handover indication information), and the separate DPCCH carrying the non-zero TFCI is sent to instruct the UE to receive the handover indication information; the corresponding base station detects that the TFCI in the DPCCH is a non-zero value, Then, it is considered that the UE correctly receives the handover indication information, and the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the separate transmission referred to herein means that the DPCCH channel is separately transmitted, and there is no accompanying dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) channel transmission.
  • DPDCH dedicated physical data channel
  • the user equipment when the user equipment receives the handover indication information, and the handover indication information indicates that the UE switches the E-DCH 10ms TTI from the E-DCH 2ms, the user equipment only sends the E-DPCCH. Send E-DPDCH.
  • the E-TFCI included in the E-DPCCH is not used for normal data transmission, and the E-TFCI may be predefined or configurable; optionally, to ensure that the E-DPCCH is detected by the base station.
  • the user equipment may transmit the E-DPCCH with the maximum power allowed, or determine the transmit power of the E-DPCCH with the second gain factor described above. This method can also be applied to the switching of E-DCH to R99 DCH.
  • the user equipment when the user equipment receives the handover indication information, and the handover indication information indicates that the UE switches from the E-DCH 10ms to the R99 DCH, the user equipment only sends the DPCCH and does not send the DPDCH.
  • the TFCI carried in the DPCCH channel is a predefined value, for example, 0; after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment sends a separate DPCCH, and the single DPCCH carries a non-zero value; If the DPCCH channel of the non-zero value TFCI is carried, it can be determined that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and then the timing of the user equipment switching to the R99 DCH can be determined.
  • This method can also be applied to the switching of E-DCH 2msTTI and E-DCH 10ms TTI.
  • the user equipment sends the DPCCH at the maximum allowed power, or determines the power of the DPCCH by using the second gain factor.
  • step 804 is specifically: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends the first enhanced dedicated transport channel.
  • An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
  • the user equipment When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the user equipment sends an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) ( E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • the UE when the UPH is smaller than the first threshold, the user is in a power limited or coverage limited state, and it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a higher rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be small at this time. Therefore, when the UE receives the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to the 10ms TTI, the UE transmits the E-DPCCH carrying the first E-TFCI (the first E-TFCI value is large), and the base station can be indicated. The UE correctly receives the handover indication information.
  • the UE after the base station sends the E-DCH 2ms switch to the 10ms TTI handover indication information, and detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the larger E-TFCI (ie, the first E-TFCI), the UE considers that the UE receives the E. -DCH 2ms is switched to 10ms of TTI handover indication information.
  • the first E-TFCI can be used for E-DCH data transmission, but when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the UE does not select the first E-TFCI for E-DCH data transmission, so the UE can use the first E. - TFCI to indicate the handover indication information sent by the base station.
  • the UPH When the UPH is greater than the second threshold, it indicates that the user is in the near-point or mid-point of the cell. At this time, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a smaller rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be larger at this time; when the UE receives After the E-DCH 10ms is switched to the 2ms handover indication information, the transmission carries the second E-TFCI (the second E-TFCI value is smaller, smaller than the first E-TFCI; or the E-DCH transport block size table E- E-DPCCH of the minimum value in the DCH Transport Block Size Table).
  • the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI with a smaller value, and considers that the UE receives the E-DCH 10ms switch to 2ms. Switch messages.
  • Steps corresponding to the base station side are step 805, and receiving a control channel that carries the transport format combination sent by the UE, so as to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, because the two parties have agreed to receive the handover indication information.
  • the radio frame is switched to the target ⁇ , for example, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, so the base station can determine the timing of the user equipment using the target ,, and then can know when to decode with the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information.
  • the uplink data sent by the user equipment so the base station does not need to perform the analysis of the two types of TTIs before and after the handover, and the hardware resources of the base station are wasted after the re-allocation signaling of the RNC is received in the prior art. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention wastes the hardware resources of the base station.
  • the method in the middle can save the hardware resources of the base station.
  • step 806 that is, switching to the target ⁇ corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point, taking the E-DCH 2ms to E-DCH 10 ms TTI handover as an example, the user equipment sends the included ⁇ After switching the E-DPCCH or DPCCH indicating the acknowledgment information, switch to the 10ms TTI in the next or several radio frames.
  • the user equipment sends the included After the TTI switches the E-DPCCH or DPCCH indicating the confirmation information, the next subframe is switched to
  • E-DCH 2ms TTI; N is predefined, or configurable.
  • the UE then proceeds to step 808 where the user equipment transmits a handover complete message with the target.
  • the handover complete message is a radio bearer setup complete message (RADIO BEARER)
  • step 807 is performed, that is, the uplink data sent by the UE is decoded by the target TTI at a predefined or pre-configured time point, and the target ⁇ corresponds to the handover indication information.
  • the base station when the base station detects the E-DPCCH, and the E-TFCI carried in the E-DPCCH is not used for normal data transmission, it is considered that the UE has received the TTI handover indication information; then the base station is in the next M radio frames or The next N subframes decode the uplink data sent by the UE according to the target ;; or
  • the base station After the base station detects that the DPCCH carrying the non-zero value, the UE considers that the UE has received the handover indication information; the base station decodes the uplink data sent by the UE according to the target in the next M radio frames or the next N subframes.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a user equipment.
  • the user equipment includes: a receiving unit 901, configured to receive transmission time interval ( ⁇ ) handover indication information sent by a radio network controller;
  • the sending unit 902 is configured to send a control channel carrying a transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the sending unit 902 is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication Information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or A separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) is sent to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • TFCI Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the sending unit 902 is specifically configured to:
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH first threshold
  • an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E- DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing unit 903, configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
  • the user equipment includes: a receiver 1003, configured to receive a transmission time interval sent by a radio network controller.
  • the switching indication information is sent to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transport format combination.
  • bus 1000 can include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, and bus 1000 will include one or more processors 1001 and memory 1002 represented by processor 1001. The various circuits representing the memory are linked together. Total Line 1000 can also link various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, as is well known in the art, and therefore, will not be further described herein.
  • Bus interface 1005 provides an interface between bus 1000 and receiver 1003, transmitter 1004. Receiver 1003 and transmitter 1004 may be the same component, i.e., a transceiver, providing means for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium.
  • a user interface 1006, such as a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, may also be provided depending on the nature of the user device.
  • the processor 1001 is responsible for managing the bus 1000 and the usual processing, and the memory 1002 can be used to store data used by the processor 1001 when performing operations.
  • the transmitter 1004 is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication Information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
  • DPCCH Physical Control Channel
  • TFCI Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication
  • the transmitter 1004 is specifically configured to:
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • E-DPCCH first threshold
  • an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E- DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the processor 1001 is configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
  • a base station includes: a first receiving unit 1101, configured to receive TTI handover indication information sent by a radio network controller; and a second receiving unit 1102, configured to: Receiving, by the user equipment, a control channel carrying a combination of transmission formats to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • the base station further includes a processing unit 1103,
  • the second receiving unit 1102 is specifically configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) that is prohibited by the user equipment to be carried in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), or to receive a separate sent by the user equipment.
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH physical control channel
  • TFCI non-zero transport channel format merge indication
  • the processing unit 1103 is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, the user equipment is confirmed based on the TFCI
  • the handover indication information has been received, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
  • the base station further includes a processing unit 1103,
  • the second receiving unit 1102 is specifically configured to: when the current location of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment.
  • E-TFC an enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • E-DPCCH an enhanced dedicated physical control channel
  • the receiving user equipment sends the carrying number
  • the processing unit 1103 is configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, the second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover. Indicates that the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • the base station further includes a decoding unit 1104, configured to start, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, the uplink data that is sent by the user equipment by the target ,, and the target ⁇ corresponds to the handover indication information.
  • a base station is provided.
  • the base station includes: a first receiver 1201, configured to receive TTI handover indication information sent by a radio network controller;
  • the second receiver 1202 is configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
  • encoder 1205 can receive data from a data source and receive control information from processor 1203. Encoder 1205 provides various signal processing functions, such as encoding, for the data, control information, and reference signals. Encoder 1205 provides the generated symbols to transmit frame processor 1206 to create a frame structure resulting in a series of frames. These frames are then provided to a transmitter 1207 which provides various signal conditioning functions including amplification, filtering, and modulating the frame onto a carrier for transmission over the wireless medium over the antenna 1208.
  • the processor 1209 parses each frame, the decoder 1204 decodes the frame, and provides the successfully decoded control signal to the processor 1203. If some frames are not successfully decoded by the decoder 1204, the processing is performed.
  • the keeper 1203 may also use ACK and/or NACK protocols to support retransmission requests for those frames.
  • the processor 1203 can provide various functions including timing, peripheral interfaces, voltage regulation, power management, and other control functions.
  • Memory 1210 can be used to store data and software for the base station.
  • the second receiver 1202 is specifically configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication that is prohibited by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH).
  • E-TFCI enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication
  • DPCCH separate physical control channel carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment
  • the processor 1203 configured to confirm that the user equipment has received based on the E-TFCI To the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, based on the TFCI, confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
  • the second receiver 1202 is specifically configured to: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and the receiving user equipment sends the first carrier An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that enhances the dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); or, when the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, Receiving, by the user equipment, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); the processor 1203, configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received The handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or the second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
  • E-DPCCH enhanced dedicated physical control
  • the decoder 1204 is configured to start, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI, where the target TTI corresponds to the handover indication information.
  • the seventh to fourth embodiments of the present invention provide that after the user equipment receives the handover indication information of the UI, the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has been determined based on the transport format combination.
  • the base station After receiving the handover indication information, the base station can know the timing of the handover of the user equipment, and then can know when to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, so the base station does not need to
  • the hardware resources of the base station are wasted according to the two types of ⁇ before and after the handover. Therefore, the method in the embodiment of the present invention can save the hardware of the base station. Resources.
  • embodiments of the present invention can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present invention may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware. Moreover, the invention can take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
  • computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • the computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device.
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a TTI switching method, a base station and a user equipment. The TTI switching method comprises: a user equipment receiving first configuration information corresponding to a first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to a second TTI; the user equipment receiving switching instruction information sent by a base station; the user equipment switching a current TTI to a target TTI corresponding to the switching instruction information, wherein the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target TTI is the other of the first TTI and the second TTI; and the user equipment sending data to the base station at the target TTI. By adopting the above-mentioned technical solution, the TTI switching is made to be in time and the time delay of the TTI switching is reduced, thereby avoiding the data loss or call drop.

Description

一种 TTI切换方法、 基站及用户设备 本申请要求在 2013年 4月 12 日 提交中 国专利局、 申请号为 PCT/CN2013/074176, 发明名称为 "一种 ΤΉ切换方法、 基站及用户设备" 的 国际专利申请的优先权, 其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。 技术领域  TTI switching method, base station and user equipment The application is submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on April 12, 2013, and the application number is PCT/CN2013/074176, and the invention name is "a handover method, base station and user equipment". Priority of International Patent Application, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference. Technical field
本发明涉及通信技术领域,特别涉及一种 ΤΉ切换方法、基站及用户设备。 背景技术  The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment. Background technique
随着通信技术的飞速发展, WCDMA ( Wideband Code Division Multiple With the rapid development of communication technology, WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple)
Access, 宽带码分多址)作为第三代移动通信系统的主流技术之一, 在全球范 围内得到了广泛的研究和应用。 在 3GPP ( 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 第三代伙伴计划)制定的 Rel-99版本中引入了 DCH信道, 称为 R99 DCH, R99 DCH信道有好的覆盖, 但只能提高较小的数据速率。 在 3GPP制定的 Rel-6版本 引入了 HSUPA ( High-Speed Uplink Packet Access , 高速上行链路分组接入 ) 技术, 在 HSUPA中所引入的传输信道为 E-DCH(Enhanced Dedicated Channel, 上行增强)。 E-DCH包含两种传输间隔 (Transmission Time Interval, TTI )类 型, 2ms TTI和 10ms TTI,其中 2ms TTI能够提供高的数据传输速率和小的传输 时延; 10ms ΤΉ能够提供更好的覆盖。 因此当用户设备(User Equipment, UE ) 从小区中心移动到小区边缘时为了获得更好的覆盖, 就需要从 2ms ΤΉ切换到 10ms TTI; 相应的, 当 UE从小区边缘移动到小区中心时, 为了获得更高的峰 值速率, 就需要从 10ms ΤΉ切换到 2ms TTI。 As one of the mainstream technologies of the third generation mobile communication system, Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access has been widely studied and applied worldwide. The DCH channel, called R99 DCH, is introduced in the Rel-99 version of the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project). The R99 DCH channel has good coverage but can only increase the data rate. The HSUPA (High-Speed Uplink Packet Access) technology is introduced in the Rel-6 version of the 3GPP. The transport channel introduced in HSUPA is E-DCH (Enhanced Dedicated Channel). The E-DCH includes two Transmission Time Interval (TTI) types, 2ms TTI and 10ms TTI, of which 2ms TTI can provide high data transmission rate and small transmission delay; 10ms ΤΉ can provide better coverage. Therefore, when the user equipment (User Equipment, UE) moves from the cell center to the cell edge, in order to obtain better coverage, it is necessary to switch from 2ms to 10ms TTI; correspondingly, when the UE moves from the cell edge to the cell center, To achieve a higher peak rate, you need to switch from 10ms to 2ms TTI.
另外, R99 DCH的覆盖大于 E-DCH lOmsTTI, 所以在 UE移动到小区边缘 时, 即使 UE当前使用的是 E-DCH lOmsTTI, 有可能覆盖仍旧存在问题, 需要 将 UE从 E-DCH 1 OmsTTI切换到 DCH对应的 TTI。  In addition, the coverage of the R99 DCH is greater than the E-DCH lOmsTTI, so when the UE moves to the cell edge, even if the UE is currently using the E-DCH lOmsTTI, there is a possibility that the coverage still has a problem, and the UE needs to be switched from the E-DCH 1 OmsTTI to The TTI corresponding to the DCH.
在现有技术中, E-DCH ΤΉ切换包含两个方面: 覆盖测量和 E-DCH TTI 切换的执行流程。 In the prior art, E-DCH ΤΉ switching involves two aspects: coverage measurement and E-DCH TTI The execution flow of the switch.
首先是覆盖测量, UE将 UPH通过 SI ( Scheduling Information, 调度信息) 上 4艮给基站, 其中 UPH ( UE transmission power headroom, UE发射功率余量), UPH为最大 UE发射功率与 DPCCH ( Dedicated Physical Control Channel , 专用 物理控制信道) 功率之比。 通常 UPH低于一门限, 则认为覆盖受限或者 UE移 动到小区边缘, 为了获得更好的覆盖, 需要配置 lOms TTI; UPH高于一门限, 则认为 UE移动到小区中心, 为了获得更高的峰值速率, 需要配置为 2ms TTI。  The first is the coverage measurement. The UE sends the UPH to the base station through SI (Scheduling Information), where UPH (UE transmission power headroom, UE transmit power headroom), and UPH is the maximum UE transmit power and DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control). Channel, dedicated physical control channel) power ratio. Generally, if the UPH is lower than a threshold, the coverage is restricted or the UE moves to the cell edge. To obtain better coverage, the lOms TTI needs to be configured. If the UPH is higher than a threshold, the UE is considered to move to the cell center, in order to obtain a higher Peak rate, need to be configured for 2ms TTI.
其次是 TTI切换的执行流程, 在现有技术中, E-DCH TTI切换的执行流程 有同步重配和异步重配两种方法, 同步重配是指基站控制器(Radio Network Control , RNC ) 分别向 UE和基站配置 TTI切换的 CFN ( Connection Frame Number, 连接帧号), UE在指定的 CFN切换到目标 ΤΉ类型, 基站在所指定的 CF 按照目标 ΤΉ类型解析 UE发送的 E-DCH数据。  The following is the execution flow of the TTI handover. In the prior art, the execution flow of the E-DCH TTI handover has two methods: synchronous reconfiguration and asynchronous reconfiguration. The synchronous reconfiguration refers to the base station controller (Radio Network Control, RNC) respectively. The UE and the base station are configured with a CFN (Connection Frame Number) of the TTI handover, and the UE switches to the target ΤΉ type in the designated CFN, and the base station parses the E-DCH data sent by the UE according to the target ΤΉ type in the specified CF.
请参考图 1所示, 为同步重配的流程图, 该同步重配方法包括:  Referring to FIG. 1 , for the flowchart of synchronous reconfiguration, the synchronous reconfiguration method includes:
首先, RNC确定执行 TTI切换, 然后 RNC向 UE发送 RRC ( Radio Resource Control, 无线资源控制)信令, 比如 RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION REQUEST (无线承载重配请求)指示 UE切换到目标 ΤΉ类型, 其中, 无线承 载重配请求中包含激活时间( Activation time ) ,激活时间例如可以用 CF 表示。 RNC向基站(例如 NodeB )发送 RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE (无线链路重配准备)消息, 该消息中携带新的配置, 其中包括 ΤΉ类型; 然 后基站向 RNC发送响应消息 (RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready, 无 线链路重配预备消息), 然后 RNC再向基站发送 Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm (无线链路重配确认) 消息, 其中, 无线连接重配确认消息中携带激 活时间, 例如也用 CF 表示, 该激活时间用于指示基站在指定的激活时间按 照 目 标 TTI解析上行数据。 再然后 , UE发送 RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE (无线承载重配响应) 消息给 RNC。  First, the RNC determines to perform a TTI handover, and then the RNC sends an RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling to the UE, such as a RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION REQUEST, indicating that the UE switches to the target type, where the radio bearer The reconfiguration request contains an activation time, which can be expressed, for example, by CF. The RNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the base station (eg, NodeB), which carries the new configuration, including the ΤΉ type; then the base station sends a response message to the RNC (RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready, wireless chain The route reconfiguration message is sent, and then the RNC sends a Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm message to the base station, where the radio link reconfiguration confirmation message carries the activation time, for example, also indicated by CF, and the activation time is used. The base station is instructed to parse the uplink data according to the target TTI at the specified activation time. Then, the UE sends a RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE message to the RNC.
而异步重配的流程与同步重配的流程类似, 只是在消息中不指定激活时 间, UE接收到重配请求后尽可能早的切换到目标 ΤΉ,基站也是同样, 尽可能 早的利用新的 TTI解析上行数据, 具体流程在此不再赘述。 The process of asynchronous reconfiguration is similar to the process of synchronous reconfiguration, except that the activation time is not specified in the message, and the UE switches to the target as soon as possible after receiving the reconfiguration request, and the base station is also the same. The uplink data is parsed by the new TTI, and the specific process will not be described here.
然而, 本发明人在实现本发明实施例中的技术方案的过程中发现, 在现 有的同步重配的过程中, RNC通过 RRC信令通知 UE执行 TTI切换, 同时通过 无线链路重配过程向基站发送新的配置信息, 需要 RNC和基站之间至少进行 3 次信令交互, 才能完成 ΤΉ切换, 所以这样的切换机制会导致 TTI切换不及时, 有较大的时延, 尤其是在从 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI切换时, 这样的时延会导致 E-DCH数据丟失甚至掉话。 而对于异步重配的方式, 基站不能准确确定 UE切 换到目标 ΤΉ的时机,收到 RNC发送的重配信令后,需要按照切换前后两种 TTI 类型尝试解析, 所以浪费基站的硬件资源。 发明内容  However, in the process of implementing the technical solution in the embodiment of the present invention, the inventor finds that, in the process of the existing synchronous reconfiguration, the RNC notifies the UE to perform TTI handover through RRC signaling, and simultaneously passes the radio link reconfiguration process. Sending new configuration information to the base station requires at least three signaling interactions between the RNC and the base station to complete the handover. Therefore, such a handover mechanism may cause the TTI handover to be untimely and has a large delay, especially in the When the 2msTTI is switched to lOmsTTI, such delay may cause E-DCH data to be lost or even dropped. For the asynchronous reconfiguration mode, the base station cannot accurately determine the timing of the UE switching to the target ,. After receiving the reconfiguration signaling sent by the RNC, the base station needs to try to parse the two TTI types before and after the handover, so the hardware resources of the base station are wasted. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法、基站及用户设备,用以避免在 TTI 切换时的时延较大, 切换不及时而导致的数据丟失或掉话的问题。  The embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment, so as to avoid the problem of data loss or dropped calls caused by a large delay and no timely handover when the TTI is switched.
本发明的第一方面, 提供一种 TTI切换方法, 包括: 用户设备接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置信息;所述用户设备接收 基站发送的切换指示信息; 所述用户设备将当前 TTI切换为与所述切换指示 信息对应的目标 ΤΉ, 其中, 所述当前 TTI为所述第一 TTI和所述第二 TTI 其中之一, 所述目标 ΤΉ为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; 所述用 户设备以所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站。  A first aspect of the present invention provides a TTI handover method, including: receiving, by a user equipment, first configuration information corresponding to a first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to a second UI; the user equipment receiving handover indication information sent by a base station The user equipment switches the current TTI to the target 对应 corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target ΤΉ is the The first device and the other one of the second ports; the user equipment transmits data to the base station at the target TTI.
结合第一方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 在所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 所述用户设备 在 E-DPCCH中携带禁止使用的 E-TFCI来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换 指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 所述用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物 理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in a second possible implementation, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the method further includes: the user equipment is carried in the E-DPCCH The E-TFCI is prohibited from being used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, the user equipment Transmitting a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where The non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 在所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括:  With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in a third possible implementation, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the method further includes:
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余 量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第一增强专用传输信 道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所 述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配 置的; 或者,  When the current ΤΉ is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E) - TFCI) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示 所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可 配置的。  When the current ΤΉ is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the user equipment sends a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E) - TFCI) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI being predefined or configurable.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 在所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 所述用户设备 以所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送控制信息或数据, 以指示已接收到所述 切换指示信息。  With the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in a fourth possible implementation, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the method further includes: the user equipment corresponding to the target The uplink scrambling code transmits control information or data to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 在所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 所述用户设备 使用 DPCCH中的域信息来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in a fifth possible implementation, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the method further includes: using, by the user equipment, domain information in the DPCCH Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 在所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 所述用户设备 在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给所述基站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。  With the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in a sixth possible implementation manner, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the method further includes: the user equipment receiving the handover The acknowledgment information is sent to the base station within a maximum time after the indication information, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第六种可能的实现方式中的任 意中, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备以所述目标 TTI发送数据 给所述基站, 具体为: 当所述用户设备以所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站 时, 所述用户设备在发送完所述确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用所述第一 TTI 发送数据给所述基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的整 数; 或 In combination with the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner to the sixth possible implementation manner, in a seventh possible implementation manner, the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the target TTI. Specifically, when the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the first network The user equipment sends data to the base station by using the first TTI after the next M subframes after the sending of the acknowledgement information, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero. ; or
当所述用户设备以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述用户设备 在发送完所述确认信息后的下 N个 CF 后用所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基 站, 其中 N为预定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零的整数。  When the user equipment sends the data to the base station by using the second ΤΉ, the user equipment sends the data to the base station by using the second ΤΉ after transmitting the next N CFs after the acknowledgment information. Where N is predefined or configurable and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现方式中的任 意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数 据给所述基站之前, 还包括:  With reference to the first aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation to the seventh possible implementation, in an eighth possible implementation, the user equipment sends data to the target Before the base station, it also includes:
所述用户设备清除 HARQ緩冲区中的数据;  The user equipment clears data in the HARQ buffer;
所述用户设备重置上行增强实体(MAC-i/is ) 实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  The user equipment resets the uplink enhanced entity (MAC-i/is) entity and sets TSN to zero.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现方式中的任 意一种, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备接收到基站发送的切换 指示信息后, 还包括: 所述用户设备将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为所述目 标 ΤΉ对应的 MAC-i PDU; 所述用户设备重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner to the seventh possible implementation manner, in the ninth possible implementation manner, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, The method further includes: the user equipment constructs data in the HARQ buffer as a MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ;; and the user equipment resets the MAC-i/is entity, and sets the TSN to 0.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现方式中的任 意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数 据给所述基站, 具体包括: 所述用户设备删除未发送成功的切换前的 TTI对 应的第一 MAC-i PDU; 所述用户设备构建所述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU, 其中, 在所述第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效 载荷相同; 所述用户设备发送所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation to the seventh possible implementation, in a tenth possible implementation, the user equipment sends data to the target The base station, the method includes: deleting, by the user equipment, a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to a TTI that is not successfully sent before the handover; the user equipment constructs a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where In the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; the user equipment sends the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现方式中的任 意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 当在所述第一 TTI下和在所述第二 TTI下, 使用相同的 TBS表时, 所述用户设备以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数据给所 述基站, 具体包括: 所述用户设备在物理层将未发送成功的切换前的 TTI对 应的第一数据编码为所述目标 TTI对应的第二数据; 所述用户设备发送所述 第二数据。 In combination with the first aspect or any one of the first possible implementation to the seventh possible implementation, in an eleventh possible implementation, when in the first TTI and in the When the same TBS table is used, the user equipment sends the data to the base station by using the target ΤΉ, and the method includes: the first corresponding to the TTI before the handover of the user equipment that is not successfully sent by the physical layer. The data is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target TTI; the user equipment sends the Second data.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第十一种可能的实现方式中的 任意一种, 在第十二种可能的实现方式中, 在用户设备接收第一 ΤΉ的第一 配置信息和第二 TTI的第二配置信息之前, 所述方法还包括: 所述用户设备 发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner to any one of the eleventh possible implementation manners, in the twelfth possible implementation manner, the user equipment receives the first configuration information of the first UI Before the second configuration information of the second TTI, the method further includes: the user equipment sends capability indication information that supports the handover.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第十二种可能的实现方式中的 任意一种, 在第十三种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备接收基站发送的切 换指示信息, 具体为: 所述用户设备接收基站发送的 HS-SCCH order。  With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner to any one of the twelfth possible implementation manners, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner, the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, Specifically, the user equipment receives an HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式至第十三种可能的实现方式中的 任意一种, 在第十四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一配置信息包括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数, 所述第二配置信息包括所述第二 TTI对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。  With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner to any one of the thirteenth possible implementation manners, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information includes the first Corresponding first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter, the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
结合第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第十五种可能的实现方式中, 所述第 一配置信息还包括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一 DTX参数和 /或第一 DRX参数, 所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 DTX参数和 /或第二 DRX 参数; 所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于确定发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率,其中,所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息 用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the fourteenth possible implementation manner, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first UI, The second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second UI; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes Determining the power of the control channel of the information, wherein the ΤΉ handover indication acknowledgment information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
第二方面, 本发明还提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 包括:  In a second aspect, the present invention further provides a method for switching, comprising:
所述基站接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置 信息; 所述基站向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。  The base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first port and the second configuration information corresponding to the second port; the base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
结合第二方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the second aspect, in the first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 在所述基站向用户设备发送要求所述用户设备进行 TTI切换的切 换指示信息之后, 所述方法还包括: 所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的确认 信息。 结合第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站向用户设备发送要求所述用户设备进行 TTI切换的切换指示信息, 具体为: 如果在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信息, 则重新发送 所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 With the second aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, after the base station sends, to the user equipment, handover indication information that requires the user equipment to perform TTI handover, The method further includes: the base station receiving the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment. With the second possible implementation of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation, the base station sends, to the user equipment, handover indication information that requires the user equipment to perform TTI handover, specifically: If the acknowledgment information is not received by the base station, the handover indication information is re-transmitted, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 在所述基站向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息后, 还包括: 所述基站接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携 带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ); 并基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用 的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或  With the second aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner, after the base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment, the method further includes: receiving, by the base station An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) for use by the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); and based on the E-TFCI, confirming that the user equipment has received The handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指 示(TFCI )的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); 并基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配 置的。  Receiving, by the base station, a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI), and confirming, according to the non-zero TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication Information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 在所述基站向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息后, 还包括: 当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且所述基站接收到的功率余量( UPH )值 小于第一阈值, 则所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 并基于 所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者,  With the second aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner, after the base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment, the method further includes: when the current If the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, the base station receives the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment. Ensuring a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirming, based on the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable Or,
当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms TTI,并且所述基站接收到的功率余量( UPH ) 值大于第二阈值, 则所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 并基 于所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current ΤΉ type is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than the second threshold, the base station receives the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of (E-TFCI), and confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI is predefined Or configurable.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站向用户设备发 送 TTI切换的切换指示信息之后, 所述方法还包括: 所述基站向无线网络控 制器发送上行增强实体重置 (MAC-i/is Reset ) 指示或上行增强实体重置 ( MAC-is Reset )指示。 Combining the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect to the fifth possible implementation In a sixth possible implementation manner, after the base station sends the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment, the method further includes: sending, by the base station, an uplink enhancement to the radio network controller. Entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indication or MAC-is Reset indication.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站向所述用户设 备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息之后, 所述方法还包括: 所述基站发送所述 用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线网络控制器。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, to any one of the sixth possible implementation manner, in a seventh possible implementation manner, the base station sends the user equipment to the user equipment After the handover indication information is switched, the method further includes: sending, by the base station, the switched target of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站具有关闭 TTI切 换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式,所述基站向所述用户设备发送 TTI 切换的切换指示信息, 具体为: 在所述基站处于所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模 式下, 所述基站向所述用户设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示信息。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, to any one of the sixth possible implementation manners, in an eighth possible implementation manner, the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI switching And transmitting, by the base station, the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment, where the base station is in the working mode of the open handover, the base station sends the user equipment to the user equipment. The switching indication information of the TTI handover is sent.
结合第八种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站 处于所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 所述基站接收无线网络控制器发送的 指示信息,并将所述基站由所述关闭 TTI切换的工作模式切换为所述开启 TTI 切换的工作模式。  With reference to the eighth possible implementation manner, in the ninth possible implementation manner, when the base station is in the working mode of the closed handover, the base station receives the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and The working mode in which the base station is switched by the off TTI is switched to the working mode in which the TTI switching is turned on.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第九种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站接收第一 TTI 对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置信息之前, 所述方法还包括: 所述基站向无线网络控制器发送支持 TTI切换的能力指示信息。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, to any one of the ninth possible implementation manner, in the tenth possible implementation manner, the base station receives the first TTI corresponding to Before the first configuration information and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, the method further includes: the base station sending, to the radio network controller, capability indication information that supports TTI handover.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站向所述用户 设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示信息的同时或之后, 所述方法还包括: 所述基 站向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络控制器发送所述指示信 息给非服务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTI。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, to any one of the tenth possible implementation manner, in an eleventh possible implementation manner, the base station is used to the user equipment Simultaneously or after transmitting the handover indication information of the TTI handover, the method further includes: the base station transmitting the indication information to the radio network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that The non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
结合第十一种可能的实现方式中, 在第十二种可能的实现方式中, 所述 指示信息中包含切换至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。 In conjunction with the eleventh possible implementation manner, in the twelfth possible implementation manner, The indication information includes time information for switching to the target ΤΉ.
结合第二方面, 在第十三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一配置信息和 /或 所述第二配置信息还包括用于确定所述用户设备发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认 信息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息用来指示所述用 户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the second aspect, in a thirteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes a control channel for determining that the user equipment sends the handover indication acknowledgement information The power of the handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
第三方面, 本发明提供一种用户设备, 包括:  In a third aspect, the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应 的第二配置信息; 第二接收单元, 用于接收基站发送的切换指示信息, 并将 所述切换指示信息发送给切换单元; 所述切换单元, 用于从所述第二接收单 元接收所述切换指示信息, 以及将当前 TTI切换为与所述切换指示信息对应 的目标 ΤΉ, 其中, 所述当前 ΤΉ为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ其中之一, 所述目标 ΤΉ为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; 第一发送单元, 用 于以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站。  a first receiving unit, configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, where the second receiving unit is configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the base station, and the switching indication information The switching unit is configured to receive the handover indication information from the second receiving unit, and switch the current TTI to a target 对应 corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current ΤΉ is One of the first ΤΉ and the second ,, the target ΤΉ is another one of the first ΤΉ and the second ;; a first sending unit, configured to send data to the target ΤΉ The base station.
结合第三方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于在 E-DPCCH中携带禁 止使用的 E-TFCI来指示所述用户设备已切换到所述目标 TTI, 其中, 所述禁 止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或用于发送单独的携带非 零传输信道格式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用 户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配 置的。  With the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to carry the prohibited use in the E-DPCCH E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has switched to the target TTI, wherein the forbidden E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or for transmitting a separate carrying non-zero transmission A Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) of the Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括:  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation, the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送 给所述基站的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指 示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或 可配置的; 或者, a second sending unit, configured to: when the current ΤΉ is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the sending carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to The user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current ΤΉ is 10ms ΤΉ, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the sending carries an enhancement of the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于以所述目标 ΤΉ对应 的上行扰码发送控制信息或数据, 以指示已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to perform uplink interference corresponding to the target The code transmits control information or data to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于使用 DPCCH中的域信 息来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate the location The user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实 现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于在接收到所述切换指 示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给所述基站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预 定义的或可配置的。  With the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to: after receiving the switching indication information The acknowledgment information is sent to the base station in a maximum time, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第六种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一发 送单元具体用于: 当以所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述第一发送 单元在所述第二发送单元发送完所述确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零 的整数; 或  With reference to the sixth possible implementation manner, in a seventh possible implementation, the first sending unit is specifically configured to: when sending data to the base station by using the first ΤΉ, the first sending unit After the second sending unit sends the next M subframes after the acknowledgement information, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero. ; or
当以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述第一发送单元在所述第 二发送单元发送完所述确认信息后的下 N个 CF 后用所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据 给所述基站, 其中 N为预定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零的整数。  When the data is sent to the base station by using the second ΤΉ, the first sending unit sends the data to the second ΤΉ after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgment information The base station, where N is predefined or configurable, and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 处 理单元, 用于在所述第一发送单元以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站之前, 清除 HARQ緩冲区中的数据; 并重置上行增强 (MAC-i/is ) 实体, 并将 TSN 置为 0。 With the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the seventh possible implementation manner, in the eighth possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, And before the first sending unit sends the data to the base station by using the target Clear the data in the HARQ buffer; reset the uplink enhancement (MAC-i/is) entity and set TSN to 0.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 处 理单元, 用于在所述第二接收单元接收到所述基站发送的切换指示信息后, 将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为所述目标 TTI对应的 MAC-i PDU; 并重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, to the seventh possible implementation manner, in the ninth possible implementation manner, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, After the second receiving unit receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the data in the HARQ buffer is constructed as a MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI; and the MAC-i/is entity is reset. , set TSN to 0.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一发送单元具体用 于: 删除未发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一 MAC-i PDU; 构建所述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU,其中,在所述第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU中,有效载荷相同;并发送所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, to any one of the seventh possible implementation manners, in the tenth possible implementation manner, the first sending unit is specifically configured to: Deleting a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the 前 before the successful handover; constructing a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first In the MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; and the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ is transmitted.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 当在所述第一 ΤΉ下和 在所述第二 ΤΉ下, 使用相同的 TBS表时, 所述用户设备还包括: 编码单元, 用于在物理层将未发送成功的所述第一 TTI对应的第一数据编码为所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二数据, 并将所述第二数据发送给所述第一发送单元; 所述第一 发送单元具体用于从所述编码单元接收所述第二数据, 并发送所述第二数据。  With reference to the third aspect or any one of the first possible implementation to the seventh possible implementation of the third aspect, in an eleventh possible implementation manner, when in the first When the same TBS table is used, the user equipment further includes: a coding unit, configured to encode, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the first TTI that is not successfully sent into the first And corresponding to the second data, and sending the second data to the first sending unit; the first sending unit is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit, and send the first Two data.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十一种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十二种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 第三发送单元, 用于发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, and the eleventh possible implementation manner, in the twelfth possible implementation manner, the user equipment further includes: The third sending unit is configured to send capability indication information that supports the handover.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十二种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二接收单元具 体用于接收基站发送的 HS-SCCH order。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, to any one of the twelfth possible implementation manners, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner, the second receiving unit is specifically used Receiving the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十三种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一配置信息包 括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数, 所述第二配置信息包 括所述第二 TTI对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。 With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, to any one of the thirteenth possible implementation manners, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first ,, the second configuration information packet The second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI is included.
结合第十四种可能的实现方式中, 在第十五种可能的实现方式中, 所述 第一配置信息还包括所述第一 TTI对应的第一 DTX参数和 /或第一 DRX参数, 所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 DTX参数和 /或第二 DRX 参数; 所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于确定发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率,其中,所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息 用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  In combination with the fourteenth possible implementation manner, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI, where The second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second UI; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes The power of the control channel indicating the acknowledgment information, wherein the ΤΉ handover indication acknowledgment information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
第四方面, 本发明还提供一种用户设备, 包括:  In a fourth aspect, the present invention further provides a user equipment, including:
接收器, 用于接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二 配置信息; 并接收基站发送的切换指示信息; 处理器, 用于基于所述切换指 示信息, 将当前 ΤΉ切换为与所述切换指示信息对应的目标 ΤΉ, 其中, 所述 当前 ΤΉ为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ其中之一, 所述目标 TTI为所述第 一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; 发送器, 用于以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数据给 所述基站。  a receiver, configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, and receive handover indication information sent by the base station, where the processor is configured to: according to the handover indication information, Switching to the target 对应 corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current ΤΉ is one of the first ΤΉ and the second ,, and the target TTI is the first ΤΉ and the second 为Another one of the ;; a transmitter, configured to send data to the base station with the target ΤΉ.
结合第四方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现的方式中, 所述发送器具体用于在 E-DPCCH中携带禁止使用的 E-TFCI来 指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或用于发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式 合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所 述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the transmitter is specifically configured to carry an E-TFCI that is forbidden in the E-DPCCH to indicate the location The user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or used to send a separate non-zero transport channel format merge indication ( a physical control channel (DPCCH) of the TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现的方式中, 所述发送器具体用于: 当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且所述用 户设备发送给所述基站的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner, the transmitter is specifically configured to: when the current UI is 2 ms TTI, and the user equipment Sending a power headroom (UPH) value to the base station that is less than a first threshold, and transmitting an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate the The user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current ΤΉ is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the sending carries an enhancement of the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 所述发送器具体用于以所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送控制信 息或数据, 以指示已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, the transmitter is specifically configured to send control information or data by using an uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ,, To indicate that the switching indication information has been received.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中,所述发送器具体用于使用 DPCCH中的域信息来指示所述用户设备 已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the transmitter is specifically configured to use domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the The switching instruction information is described.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实 现方式中, 所述发送器具体用于在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内 发送确认信息给所述基站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, the transmitter is specifically configured to send the acknowledgement information within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information To the base station, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器还用于: 当以 所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 在发送完所述确认信息后的下 M个子 帧后用所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的整数; 或  With reference to the fourth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation to the sixth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation, the transmitter is further configured to: When the first data is sent to the base station, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgement information is sent, where M is predefined or configurable. , M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; or
当以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 在发送完所述确认信息后的 下 N个 CF 后用所述第二 TTI发送数据给所述基站, 其中 N为预定义的或 可配置的, N为大于等于零的整数。  When the data is sent to the base station by using the second ΤΉ, the second TTI is used to send data to the base station after the next N CFs are sent, where N is predefined or Configured, N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器还用于清除 HARQ緩冲区中的数据; 并重置上行增强 (MAC-i/is ) 实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, to any one of the seventh possible implementation manners, in an eighth possible implementation manner, the processor is further configured to clear the HARQ buffer Data in the flush; and reset the uplink enhanced (MAC-i/is) entity, setting TSN to zero.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种,在第九种可能的实现方式中,所述处理器还用于将 HARQ 緩存中的数据,构建为所述目标 TTI对应的 MAC-i PDU;重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN置为 0。 With reference to the fourth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation to the seventh possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a ninth possible implementation, the processor is further configured to use the HARQ The data in the cache is constructed as the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI; the MAC-i/is entity is reset, and the TSN is set to zero.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器还用于删除未 发送成功的切换前的 TTI对应的第一 MAC-i PDU; 构建所述目标 TTI对应的 第二 MAC-i PDU,其中,在所述第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU 中, 有效载荷相同; 所述发送器用于发送所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, to any one of the seventh possible implementation manners, in the tenth possible implementation manner, the processor is further configured to delete the unsent a first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the TTI before the successful handover; constructing a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, wherein in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i In the PDU, the payload is the same; the transmitter is configured to send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括编 码器, 用于在物理层将未发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一数据编码为所 述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二数据; 所述发送器用于发送所述第二数据。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, to any one of the seventh possible implementation manner, in an eleventh possible implementation manner, the user equipment further includes an encoder, The first data corresponding to the 前 before the handover that is not successfully transmitted is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target 在 at the physical layer; the transmitter is configured to send the second data.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十一种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十二种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器还用于发 送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect to the eleventh possible implementation manner, in the twelfth possible implementation manner, the transmitter is further configured to send Capability indication information that supports ΤΉ switching.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十二种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十三种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收器还用于接 收基站发送的 HS-SCCH order。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, to any one of the twelfth possible implementation manners, in a thirteenth possible implementation manner, the receiver is further configured to receive HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十三种可能的实 现方式中的任意一种, 在第十四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一配置信息包 括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数, 所述第二配置信息包 括所述第二 TTI对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, to any one of the thirteenth possible implementation manners, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner, the first configuration information includes The first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first ΤΉ, the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
结合第四方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中, 在第十五种可能的实现方 式中,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一 DTX参数和 /或第一 DRX参数, 所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 TTI对应的第二 DTX参数和 / 或第二 DRX参数;所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于确定 发送包含 TTI切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指 示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 With reference to the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the fifteenth possible implementation, the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter corresponding to the first UI and/or a first The second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes Transmitting a power of a control channel including TTI handover indication acknowledgement information, where The confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
第五方面, 本发明提供一种基站, 包括:  In a fifth aspect, the present invention provides a base station, including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应 的第二配置信息; 第一发送单元, 用于向用户设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示 信息。  The first receiving unit is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, where the first sending unit is configured to send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment.
结合第五方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the fifth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的 确认信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
结合第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 第一发送单元具体还用于如果在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信 息, 则重新发送所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配 置的。  With the second possible implementation of the fifth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the first sending unit is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within a maximum time, re Sending the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 所述基站还包括:  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes:
第二接收单元, 用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 a second receiving unit, configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel
( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 ( TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) carried in (E-DPCCH); or, for receiving a separate physics carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment Control channel (DPCCH);
处理单元,用于基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指 示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的;或, 用于基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其 中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  a processing unit, configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or For confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述基站还包括:  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes:
第二接收单元, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms ΤΉ , 并且所述基站接收到的 功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一增强 专用传输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 或, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且所述基站接收到的功率余量 ( UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ); a second receiving unit, configured to: when the current UI is 2ms ΤΉ, and received by the base station The power headroom (UPH) value is less than the first threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) or The current ΤΉ type is 10ms ΤΉ, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, and the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment is received. Enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH);
处理单元,用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切 换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于所述第 二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的。  a processing unit, configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第二发 送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送上行增强实体重置 ( MAC-i/is Reset )指 示或上行增强实体重置 ( MAC-is Reset )指示。  With reference to the fifth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, and the fifth possible implementation manner, in a sixth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a second sending unit And sending an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indication or an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication to the radio network controller.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第三发 送单元, 用于发送所述用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线网络控制器。  With reference to the fifth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, and the fifth possible implementation manner, in a seventh possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a third sending unit And transmitting, to the radio network controller, the switched target of the user equipment.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站具有关闭 TTI切 换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 所述第一发送单元具体用于在在 所述基站处于所述开启 TTI切换的工作模式下, 向所述用户设备发送 TTI切 换的切换指示信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, to any one of the possible implementation manners of the seventh aspect, in an eighth possible implementation manner, the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI handover The first sending unit is configured to send the switching indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment in an working mode in which the base station is in the initiating TTI handover.
结合第五方面的第八种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第三接收单元, 用于在所述基站处于所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的 工作模式下, 接收所述无线网络控制器发送的指示信息, 并将所述指示信息 发送给切换单元; 所述切换单元, 用于基于所述指示信息将所述基站由所述 关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式切换为所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。  With reference to the eighth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a third receiving unit, configured to be in a working mode in which the base station is in the closed/switching mode Receiving the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and sending the indication information to the switching unit, where the switching unit is configured to switch the working mode of the base station by the shutdown switch based on the indication information. The working mode for the said ΤΉ switching.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第九种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中,, 所述基站还包括: 第四发 送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。 Combining the fifth aspect or the first possible implementation of the fifth aspect to the possible implementation of the ninth In a tenth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a fourth sending unit, configured to send, to the radio network controller, capability indication information that supports handover.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中,, 所述基站还包括: 第五 发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络控制器发 送所述指示信息给非服务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTL  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, to any one of the possible implementation manners of the tenth, in an eleventh possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a sending unit, configured to send indication information to the radio network controller, to enable the radio network controller to send the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTL after the handover
结合第五方面的第十一种可能的实现方式, 在第十二种可能的实现方式 中, 所述指示信息中包含切换至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。  With reference to the eleventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the twelfth possible implementation, the indication information includes time information that is switched to the target ΤΉ.
第六方面, 本发明提供一种基站, 包括:  In a sixth aspect, the present invention provides a base station, including:
接收器, 用于接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二 配置信息; 发送器, 用于向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。  The receiver is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, and the transmitter is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
结合第六方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,,所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2ms, 所述第二 TTI具体为 10ms。  With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first ΤΉ is specifically 2 ms, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述接收器还用于: 接收所述用户设备发送的确认信息。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the receiver is further configured to: receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
结合第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器还用于: 如果在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信息, 则重新发送所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。  With the second possible implementation of the sixth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the transmitter is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within a maximum time, re Sending the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第一处理器,  With reference to the sixth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner, the base station further includes: a first processor,
所述接收器还用于: 用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 ( TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH );  The receiver is further configured to: receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) for use by the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or, for receiving a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
所述第一处理器用于基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切 换指示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 用于基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The first processor is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; Or for determining, according to the non-zero TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述基站还包括: 第一处理器,  With reference to the sixth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the base station further includes: a first processor,
所述接收器还用于: 用于当所述当前 TTI为 2ms TTI, 并且所述基站接收 到的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 The receiver is further configured to: when the current TTI is a 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than a first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (E-TFCI)
( E-DPCCH )或, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且所述基站接收 到的功率余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH) or, configured to: when the current ΤΉ type is 10ms ΤΉ, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, and receive the second enhanced dedicated Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel for Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (E-TFCI)
( E-DPCCH ); ( E-DPCCH );
所述第一处理器用于: 基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到 所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  The first processor is configured to: confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, And confirming, by the second E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器还用于: 向无 线网络控制器发送上行增强实体重置 (MAC-i/is Reset )指示上行增强实体重 置( MAC-is Reset )指示。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, and the fifth possible implementation manner, in a sixth possible implementation manner, the transmitter is further configured to: The network controller sends an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-i/is Reset) indicating an uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器还用于: 发送 所述用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线网络控制器。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect to the sixth possible implementation manner, in a seventh possible implementation manner, the transmitter is further configured to: The target of the switching of the user equipment is given to the radio network controller.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站具有关闭 TTI切 换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 所述发送器具体用于: 在所述基 站处于所述开启 TTI切换的工作模式下, 向所述用户设备发送 TTI切换的切 换指示信息。 结合第六方面的第八种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收器用于在所述基站处于所述关闭 TTI切换的工作模式下, 接收无线 网络控制器发送的指示信息; 所述基站还包括处理器, 用于: 将所述基站由 所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式切换为所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。 With reference to the sixth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, to the sixth possible implementation manner, in an eighth possible implementation manner, the base station has an operation mode for turning off TTI handover. And the working mode of the ΤΉ handover is performed, where the transmitter is specifically configured to: when the base station is in the working mode of enabling the TTI handover, send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment. With reference to the eighth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner, the receiver is configured to receive, when the base station is in the working mode of the off TTI handover, receive the sending by the radio network controller The base station further includes a processor, configured to: switch the working mode of the base station from the closed switch to the working mode of the open switch.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第九种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器用于向无线网 络控制器发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect to the ninth possible implementation manner, in a tenth possible implementation manner, the transmitter is used to send to a radio network controller Send capability indication information that supports handover.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第十种的可能实现 方式中的任意一种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器用于向无线 网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络控制器发送所述指示信息给非服 务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTI。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or any one of the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect to the tenth possible implementation manner, in an eleventh possible implementation manner, the transmitter is used to control to a wireless network And transmitting the indication information, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover.
结合第六方面的第十一种可能的实现方式, 在第十二种可能的实现方式 中, 所述指示信息中包含切换至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。  With reference to the eleventh possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the twelfth possible implementation, the indication information includes time information that is switched to the target ΤΉ.
第七方面, 本发明提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 包括:  In a seventh aspect, the present invention provides a method for switching, comprising:
用户设备接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔( ΤΤΙ )切换指示信息; 所述用户设备发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基站 能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。  The user equipment receives the transmission time interval ( ΤΤΙ ) handover indication information sent by the radio network controller; the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine the user equipment based on the transport format combination The handover indication information has been received.
结合第七方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备发送携带传 输格式组合的控制信道具体为:  With reference to the seventh aspect, in a first possible implementation, the user equipment sends a control channel carrying a combination of transmission formats, specifically:
所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述 切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留 的; 或  The user equipment carries an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where The prohibited E-TFCI is pre-defined or configurable or reserved; or
所述用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物 理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  The user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
结合第七方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备发送携带传 输格式组合的控制信道具体为: With reference to the seventh aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the user equipment sends a carrying The control channel combination of the transmission format is specifically:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第一增强专用 传输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以 指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的 或可配置的; 或者,  When the current ΤΉ of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication ( An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输信 道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所 述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配 置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the user equipment sends a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI being predefined or configurable.
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现 方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述 ΤΤΙ切换指示信息中包含第一增益 因子和第二增益因子, 所述第一增益因子用于确定所述用户设备发送不包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认的控制信道的功率,所述第二增益因子用于确定所述用户设 备发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认的控制信道的功率; 其中, 所述 ΤΤΙ切换指示 确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。  With reference to the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation manner or the second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner, the ΤΤΙ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second a gain factor, the first gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends power of a control channel that does not include a handover indication acknowledgement, and the second gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends a control that includes a handover indication acknowledgement The power of the channel; wherein the ΤΤΙ handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第七方面, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备发送携带传 输格式组合的控制信道给基站后, 还包括: 所述用户设备在预定义或预配置 的时间点切换到与所述切换指示信息对应的目标 ΤΤΙ。  With reference to the seventh aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner, after the user equipment sends the control channel that carries the combination of the transport format to the base station, the method further includes: the user equipment switching to the predefined or pre-configured time point The switching indication information corresponds to a target ΤΤΙ.
第八方面, 本发明提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 包括:  In an eighth aspect, the present invention provides a method for switching, comprising:
基站接收无线网络控制器发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息;  Receiving, by the base station, the handover indication information sent by the radio network controller;
所述基站接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定所 述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。  The base station receives a control channel that carries a combination of transmission formats sent by the user equipment, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第八方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站接收用户设备发 送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 具体为:  With reference to the eighth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the base station receives, by the user equipment, a control channel that carries a transport format combination, which is specifically:
所述基站接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携 带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ), 并基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用 的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 Receiving, by the base station, the user equipment to carry in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) with a forbidden use, and confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is used Pre-defined or configurable or reserved; or
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 ( TFCI )的物理控制信道(DPCCH ), 并基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设备 已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  Receiving, by the user equipment, a physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI), and confirming, by the TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, The non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第八方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站接收用户设备发 送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 具体为:  With reference to the eighth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the base station receives, by the user equipment, a control channel that carries a transport format combination, which is specifically:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带 第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 并基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换 指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者,  When the current ΤΉ of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, the base station receives the first enhanced dedicated transport channel that is sent by the user equipment. An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the format merge indication (E-TFCI), and based on the first E-TFCI confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI Pre-defined or configurable; or,
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增 强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 并基于所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换 指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, the base station receives a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment. An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of (E-TFCI), and based on the second E-TFCI confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI is predefined Or configurable.
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第八方面的第二种 方式, 在第三可能的实现方式中, 在所述基站接收用户设备发送的携带传输 格式组合的控制信道后, 还包括:  With reference to the eighth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, or the second aspect of the eighth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the receiving, by the base station, a control of a carrier transport format combination sent by a user equipment After the channel, it also includes:
所述基站在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 ΤΤΙ译码所述用户设备 发送的上行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。  The base station starts to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target 在 at a predefined or pre-configured time point, where the target 对应 corresponds to the handover indication information.
结合第八方面, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指示信息中 包含第一增益因子和第二增益因子, 所述第一增益因子用于确定所述用户设 备发送不包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 所述第二增益因子 用于确定所述用户设备发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率; 其中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换 指示信息。 With reference to the eighth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, the ΤΉ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, where the first gain factor is used to determine that the user equipment sends no ΤΉ Switching the power of the control channel indicating the acknowledgment information, where the second gain factor is used to determine the power of the user equipment to transmit the control channel including the ΤΉ handover indication acknowledgment information; The ΤΉ handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
第九方面, 本发明提供一种用户设备, 包括:  In a ninth aspect, the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收单元, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔(ΤΤΙ )切换指 示信息;  a receiving unit, configured to receive a transmission time interval (ΤΤΙ) switching indication information sent by the radio network controller;
发送单元, 用于发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基 站能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。  And a sending unit, configured to send a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第九方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送单元具体用于: 在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输信道 格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其 中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或  With reference to the ninth aspect, in a first possible implementation, the sending unit is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  Transmitting a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or Configured.
结合第九方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送单元具体用于: 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式 合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者  With reference to the ninth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the sending unit is specifically configured to: when a current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and a power headroom UPH sent by the user equipment to the base station Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, if the value is smaller than the first threshold. The first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, sending an enhanced dedicated carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第九方面, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 处理单元, 用于控制所述用户设备在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与 所述切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI。 第十方面, 本发明提供一种用户设备, 包括: With reference to the ninth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to control, by the user equipment, to switch to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point The target TTI. In a tenth aspect, the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收器, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔( ΤΉ )切换指示 信息;  a receiver, configured to receive a transmission time interval ( ΤΉ ) switching indication message sent by the radio network controller;
发送器, 用于发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基站 能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。  And a transmitter, configured to send a control channel carrying a transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第十方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器具体用于: 在 增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格 式合并指示(E-TFCI )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或  With reference to the tenth aspect, in a first possible implementation, the transmitter is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) Instructing the user equipment that the handover indication information has been received, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  Transmitting a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or Configured.
结合第十方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送器具体用于: 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式 合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者  With reference to the tenth aspect, in a second possible implementation, the transmitter is specifically configured to: when a current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and a power headroom UPH sent by the user equipment to the base station Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, if the value is smaller than the first threshold. The first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, sending an enhanced dedicated carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) a physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第十方面, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备还包括: 处 理单元, 用于控制所述用户设备在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与所述切 换指示信息对应的目标 TTI。  With the tenth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to control, by the user equipment, to switch to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point The target TTI.
第十一方面, 本发明提供一种基站, 包括:  In an eleventh aspect, the present invention provides a base station, including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息; 第二接收单元, 用于接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 a first receiving unit, configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the radio network controller; And a second receiving unit, configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
结合第十一方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括处理单 元,  With reference to the eleventh aspect, in a first possible implementation, the base station further includes a processing unit,
所述第二接收单元具体用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 The second receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel.
( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) carried in the (E-DPCCH), or a separate physical control channel carrying the non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) transmitted by the user equipment (DPCCH);
所述处理单元, 用于基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切 换指示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所 述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  The processing unit is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved Or, based on the TFCI, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第十一方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括处理单 元,  With reference to the eleventh aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the base station further includes a processing unit,
所述第二接收单元具体用于当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI,并且 所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用 户设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专 用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设 备发送的携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物 理控制信道(E-DPCCH );  The second receiving unit is configured to: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold, and receive the carrying by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); or, when the current frame of the user equipment is a 10 ms TTI, and the user equipment sends to the base station The UPH value is greater than the second threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI);
所述处理单元, 用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所 述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是 预定义的或可配置的。  The processing unit is configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第十一方面, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括译码单 元, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 TTI译码所述用户设备发送 的上行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。 With reference to the eleventh aspect, in a third possible implementation, the base station further includes: a decoding unit, configured to start, by using a target TTI, the user equipment to send at a predefined or pre-configured time point Uplink data, the target ΤΉ corresponding to the handover indication information.
第十二方面, 本发明提供一种基站, 包括:  According to a twelfth aspect, the present invention provides a base station, including:
第一接收器, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息; 第二接收器, 用于接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。  a first receiver, configured to receive the handover indication information sent by the radio network controller, where the second receiver is configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the Switch the indication information.
结合第十二方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括处理器, 所述第二接收器具体用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 With reference to the twelfth aspect, in a first possible implementation, the base station further includes a processor, where the second receiver is specifically configured to receive the user equipment in an enhanced dedicated physical control channel.
( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); An enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) carried in the (E-DPCCH), or a separate physical control channel carrying the non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) transmitted by the user equipment (DPCCH);
所述处理器,用于基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换 指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所 述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  The processor is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. Or, based on the TFCI, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
结合第十二方面, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括处理器, 所述第二接收器具体用于当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI,并且所 述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户 设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用 物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设 备发送的携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物 理控制信道(E-DPCCH );  With reference to the twelfth aspect, in a second possible implementation, the base station further includes a processor, where the second receiver is specifically configured to: when the current device of the user equipment is a 2 ms TTI, and the user equipment Receiving, by the user equipment, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that carries a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI), where the power headroom UPH value sent to the base station is less than a first threshold; Or, when the current frame of the user equipment is a 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than a second threshold, receiving a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment ( Enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of E-TFCI);
所述处理器,用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述 切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是 预定义的或可配置的。  The processor, configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
结合第十二方面, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述基站还包括译码器, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 ΤΉ译码所述用户设备发送的上 行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。 With reference to the twelfth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the base station further includes a decoder, And the uplink data sent by the user equipment is started to be decoded by the target 在 at a predefined or pre-configured time point, where the target ΤΉ corresponds to the handover indication information.
本发明有益效果如下:  The beneficial effects of the present invention are as follows:
本发明实施例中, 在用户设备端预配有第一 ΤΉ和第一 ΤΉ不同的第二 TTI, 以及第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息, 只要 在接收到基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 就可以直接对用户设备的当前 TTI进 行切换, 并切换至与切换指示信息对应的目标 ΤΉ, 并以目标 ΤΉ发送数据给 基站, 所以不需要在切换的过程中, RNC再向基站发送新的配置信息, 所以 也就不需要 RNC和基站之间进行多次信令交互, 所以本实施例中的 TTI切换过 程及时, 时延较小, 所以避免了在 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI切换时, E-DCH数据丟 失或掉话, 同时因为能够及时执行 lOmsTTI向 2msTTI的切换, 所以能够提高 峰值速率。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the user equipment is pre-configured with a second TTI different from the first one and the first one, and the first configuration information corresponding to the first one and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI, as long as receiving After the handover indication information sent by the base station, the current TTI of the user equipment can be directly switched, and the target ΤΉ corresponding to the handover indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by the target ,, so there is no need to be in the process of handover. The RNC sends the new configuration information to the base station again, so that the signaling interaction between the RNC and the base station is not required. Therefore, the TTI handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so the 2ms TTI is avoided. When the OmsTTI is switched, the E-DCH data is lost or dropped, and the peak rate can be increased because the lOmsTTI can be switched to the 2ms TTI in time.
进一步, 本发明第七方面至第十二方面, 提供了在用户设备接收到 ΤΉ的 切换指示信息后, 用户设备会向基站发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 使 得基站能够基于传输格式组合确定用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 所以基 站就可以获知用户设备切换 TTI的时机, 然后就可以知道何时以与切换指示信 息对应的目标 TTI来译码用户设备发送的上行数据, 所以基站不需要向现有技 术中那样在收到 RNC的重配信令后,按照切换前后两种 ΤΉ类型尝试解析而导 致浪费基站的硬件资源, 因此, 本发明实施例中的方法能够节约基站的硬件 资源。 附图说明  Further, the seventh to twelfth aspects of the present invention provide that after the user equipment receives the handover indication information of the UI, the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine the user based on the transport format combination. The device has received the handover indication information, so the base station can know the timing of the user equipment switching the TTI, and then can know when to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, so the base station does not need to In the prior art, after receiving the reconfiguration signaling of the RNC, the hardware resources of the base station are saved by attempting to parse the two types of ΤΉ before and after the handover. Therefore, the method in the embodiment of the present invention can save hardware resources of the base station. DRAWINGS
图 1为现有技术中的 ΤΉ切换的方法流程图;  1 is a flow chart of a method for switching a chirp in the prior art;
图 2为本发明一实施例中 UE侧的 ΤΉ切换方法的流程图;  2 is a flowchart of a method for handover of a UE on a UE side according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 3为本发明一实施例中以目标 ΤΉ发送数据的示意图;  3 is a schematic diagram of transmitting data by a target 一 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 4为本发明一实施例中基站侧的 ΤΉ切换方法的流程图; 图 5为本发明一实施例中的 T Ή切换的交互方法流程图; 4 is a flowchart of a method for handover of a base station on a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 5 is a flowchart of an interaction method of T Ή handover according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 6为本发明一实施例中的用户设备的功能框图;  6 is a functional block diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 7为本发明一实施例中的用户设备的硬件实现的示例概念图;  FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of hardware implementation of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 8为本发明一实施例中的基站的功能框图;  FIG. 8 is a functional block diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 9为本发明一实施例中的基站的硬件实现的示例概念图;  FIG. 9 is a schematic conceptual diagram of a hardware implementation of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 10为本发明另一实施例中的 ΤΤΙ切换的交互方法流程图;  FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an interaction method of a handover according to another embodiment of the present invention;
图 11为本发明另一实施例中的用户设备的功能框图;  FIG. 11 is a functional block diagram of a user equipment according to another embodiment of the present invention;
图 12为本发明另一实施例中的用户设备的硬件实现的示例概念图; 图 13为本发明另一实施例中的基站的功能框图;  FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a hardware implementation of a user equipment according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention;
图 14为本发明另一实施例中的基站的硬件实现的示例概念图。 具体实施方式  FIG. 14 is a schematic conceptual diagram of a hardware implementation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
本发明一实施例提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法、 基站及用户设备, 在用户设备 端和基站端都预配有与当前的第一 ΤΉ不同的第二 ΤΤΙ,所以不需要在切换的 过程中, RNC再向基站发送新的配置信息,所以也就不需要 RNC和基站之间 进行多次信令交互, 所以在本实施例中只要由基站触发 ΤΤΙ切换即可, 所以 本实施例中的 ΤΤΙ切换过程及时,时延较小,所以避免了在 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI 切换时, E-DCH数据丟失或掉话, 同时因为能够及时执行 lOmsTTI向 2msTTI 的切换, 所以能够提高峰值速率。  An embodiment of the present invention provides a handover method, a base station, and a user equipment. The user equipment end and the base station end are pre-configured with a second UI different from the current first one. Therefore, the RNC does not need to be in the process of handover. Then, the new configuration information is sent to the base station, so that there is no need to perform multiple signaling interactions between the RNC and the base station. Therefore, in this embodiment, the handover can be triggered by the base station, so the handover process in this embodiment. In time, the delay is small, so E-DCH data loss or dropped calls are avoided when the 2ms TTI is switched to lOmsTTI, and the peak rate can be increased because the switching of lOmsTTI to 2ms TTI can be performed in time.
为使本发明实施例的目的、 技术方案和优点更加清楚, 下面将结合本发 明实施例中的附图, 对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是全部的实施例。 基于 本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获 得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is a partial embodiment of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
本文中结合用户设备和 /或基站和 /或基站控制器来描述各种方面。  Various aspects are described herein in connection with user equipment and/or base stations and/or base station controllers.
用户设备, 可以是无线终端也可以是有线终端, 无线终端可以是指向用 户提供语音和 /或数据连通性的设备, 具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、 或连 接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。 无线终端可以经无线接入网 (例如,The user equipment may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal, and the wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, a handheld device with wireless connection function, or even Receive other processing devices from the wireless modem. The wireless terminal can be accessed via a wireless access network (eg,
RAN , Radio Access Network )与一个或多个核心网进行通信, 无线终端可以 是移动终端, 如移动电话(或称为 "蜂窝" 电话)和具有移动终端的计算机, 例如, 可以是便携式、 袖珍式、 手持式、 计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置, 它们与无线接入网交换语言和 /或数据。 例如, 个人通信业务(PCS, Personal Communication Service ) 电话、 无绳电话、 会话发起协议 ( SIP )话机、 无线 本地环路( WLL, Wireless Local Loop )站、个人数字助理( PDA, Personal Digital Assistant )等设备。 无线终端也可以称为系统、 订户单元( Subscriber Unit )、 订户站 ( Subscriber Station ), 移动站( Mobile Station )、 移动台 ( Mobile )、 远 程占 ( Remote Station )、接入点( Access Point )、远程终端( Remote Terminal )、 接入终端( Access Terminal )、用户终端( User Terminal )、用户代理( User Agent )、 用户设备 ( User Device )、 或用户装备 ( User Equipment )。 RAN (Radio Access Network) communicates with one or more core networks, which may be mobile terminals, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminals, for example, may be portable, pocket-sized , handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with a wireless access network. For example, personal communication service (PCS), cordless telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), personal digital assistant (PDA), etc. . A wireless terminal may also be called a system, a Subscriber Unit, a Subscriber Station, a Mobile Station, a Mobile, a Remote Station, an Access Point, Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, User Agent, User Device, or User Equipment.
基站 (例如, 接入点)可以是指接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个 扇区与无线终端通信的设备。 基站可用于将收到的空中帧与 IP分组进行相互 转换, 作为无线终端与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器, 其中接入网的其余 部分可包括网际协议(IP )网络。基站还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如, 基站可以是 CDMA 中的基站 (BTS , Base Transceiver Station ), 也可以是 WCDMA中的基站( NodeB ) , 还可以是 LTE中的演进型基站( NodeB或 eNB 或 e-NodeB , evolutional Node B ), 本申请并不限定。  A base station (e.g., an access point) can refer to a device in an access network that communicates with a wireless terminal over one or more sectors over an air interface. The base station can be used to convert the received air frame to the IP packet as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network, wherein the remainder of the access network can include an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The base station can also coordinate attribute management of the air interface. For example, the base station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or may be an evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) This application is not limited.
基站控制器, 可以是 CDMA 中的基站控制器 ( BSC , base station controller ), 也可以是 WCDMA中的无线网络控制器( RNC , Radio Network Controller ), 本申请并不限定。  The base station controller may be a base station controller (BSC) in CDMA or a radio network controller (RNC) in WCDMA, which is not limited in this application.
另外, 本文中术语 "和 /或", 仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系, 表示 可以存在三种关系, 例如, A和 /或 B, 可以表示: 单独存在 A , 同时存在 A 和 B, 单独存在 B这三种情况。 另外, 本文中字符 "/" , 一般表示前后关联对 象是一种 "或" 的关系。  In addition, the term "and/or" in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may indicate: A exists separately, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
下面结合附图对本发明优选的实施方式进行详细说明。 实施例一 Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Embodiment 1
本实施例是站在 UE侧对本发明进行描述,请参考图 2所示, 本发明实施 例提供一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 该方法包括如下步骤:  In this embodiment, the present invention is described on the UE side. Referring to FIG. 2, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for switching, and the method includes the following steps:
步骤 101:用户设备接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的 第二配置信息。  Step 101: The user equipment receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI.
其中, 第一 TTI具体为 2msTTI, 所述第二 TTI具体为 lOmsTTI, 即第一 TTI和第二 ΤΉ均为 E-DCH下的 ΤΉ。  The first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI, that is, the first TTI and the second ΤΉ are both E under E-DCH.
但在另一实施例中, 第一 ΤΉ和第二 ΤΉ还可以属于不同的协议版本中 的 ΤΤΙ, 例如第一 ΤΉ为 E-DCH中的 lOmsTTI, 而第二 ΤΉ为 R99 DCH中 的 20msTTI。  However, in another embodiment, the first 第二 and the second ΤΉ may also belong to 不同 in different protocol versions, for example, the first l is lOmsTTI in E-DCH, and the second 20 is 20ms TTI in R99 DCH.
在具体实施过程中, 步骤 101 具体为: 用户设备接收 RNC发送的第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息。 其中, RNC可通 过专用 RRC信令向 UE发送第一 ΤΉ和第二 ΤΉ分别对应的资源配置信息。 需要说明的是, 第一配置信息和第二配置信息还可以是预定义的, 即不需要 RNC配置的,优先选择 RNC配置的方法,所以本发明以 RNC配置为例介绍。  In the specific implementation process, the step 101 is specifically: the user equipment receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI that are sent by the RNC. The RNC may send the resource configuration information corresponding to the first 第二 and the second 向 to the UE by using dedicated RRC signaling. It should be noted that the first configuration information and the second configuration information may also be predefined, that is, the method of RNC configuration is preferred, and the RNC configuration is taken as an example.
在实际运用中, RNC向 UE发送第一配置信息和第二配置信息的过程可 以是同时的, 也可以不是同时的, 相应的, 在步骤 101中, UE接收第一 TTI 对应的配置信息和接收第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息可以是同时的, 也可以 不是同时的。  In an actual application, the process of the RNC sending the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the UE may be the same or not, and correspondingly, in step 101, the UE receives the configuration information and the corresponding information corresponding to the first TTI. The second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI may or may not be simultaneous.
首先, 假设第一 TTI为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI为 lOmsTTI, 例如, 在初始 First, assume that the first TTI is 2msTTI and the second TTI is lOmsTTI, for example, at the initial
RRC连接建立后, RNC就预配 lOmsTTI信息 (这里 4叚设 UE的当前 ΤΉ为 2msTTI )给 UE。 After the RRC connection is established, the RNC pre-configures the lOmsTTI information (here, the UE's current frame is 2msTTI) to the UE.
再例如, RNC基于 6a event来决策预配 lOmsTTI信息 (这里假设 UE的 当前 ΤΉ为 2msTTI )给 UE, 其中, 6a event是指 UE总的发射功率大于预设 的门限值, 那么 UE就上报总的发射功率给 RNC, 那么 RNC就可以根据 6a event决策需要预配 lOmsTTI信息给 UE。  For example, the RNC determines the pre-configured lOmsTTI information based on the 6a event (here, the current UE of the UE is 2msTTI) to the UE, where the 6a event is that the total transmit power of the UE is greater than a preset threshold, then the UE reports the total The transmit power to the RNC, then the RNC can pre-configure the lOmsTTI information to the UE according to the 6a event decision.
在进一步的实施例中, 当 RNC在同时发送第一配置信息和第二配置信息 给 UE时, 同时还指定 UE当前使用的 ΤΉ类型, 在通常情况下, 为了防止掉 话, RNC会指定 UE当前使用的 ΤΉ为 10msTTI。 In a further embodiment, when the RNC is transmitting the first configuration information and the second configuration information at the same time When the UE is given, the ΤΉ type currently used by the UE is also specified. In general, to prevent dropped calls, the RNC specifies that the UE currently using ΤΉ is 10msTTI.
进一步, RNC发送的第一配置信息和第二配置信息中,分别包含各个 TTI 对应的一套增强专用信道媒质接入控制流( E-DCH MAC-d flow )参数,例如, 基于 E-DCH MAC-d flow Identity (增强专用信道 MAC-d 流标识) 配置的 E-DCH MAC-d flow maximum number of retransmissions (增强专用信道 MAC-d流最大重传次数)、 ACK (正确认) 功率偏置 NACK (负确认)功率 偏置或 E-DPCCH/DPCCH power offset (数据信道和控制信道的功率偏置); 第 一 TTI对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数, 第二配置信息包括第二 ΤΉ对 应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数; 进一步, 还可以包含其他参数, 例如为 第一 TTI和第二 TTI分另 ll配置一套 DTX ( Discontinuous Transmission, 不连续 发送)参数和 /或 DRX ( Discontinuous Reception, 不连续接收)参数, 本申请 不作限定。  Further, the first configuration information and the second configuration information sent by the RNC respectively include a set of enhanced dedicated channel media access control flow (E-DCH MAC-d flow) parameters corresponding to each TTI, for example, based on the E-DCH MAC. -d flow Identity (E-DCH MAC-d flow maximum number of retransmissions), ACK (positive acknowledgement) power offset NACK (negative acknowledgment) power offset or E-DPCCH/DPCCH power offset (the power offset of the data channel and the control channel); the first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI, and the second configuration information includes the second第二 corresponding second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter; further, may further include other parameters, for example, configuring a set of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) parameters and/or for the first TTI and the second TTI The DRX (Discontinuous Reception) parameter is not limited in this application.
进一步, 第一配置信息和 /或第二配置信息还包括但不限於用于确定发送 包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率。 TTI切换指示确认信息用来指 示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息。  Further, the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes, but is not limited to, a power for determining to transmit a control channel including the handover indication acknowledgement information. The TTI handover indication acknowledgement information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
较佳的, 在另一实施例中, 在步骤 101之前, UE还向 RNC上报支持 TTI 切换的能力指示信息, 例如 UE 可以在 RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE ( RRC连接建立完成 ) 消息中上报该能力指示信息。  Preferably, in another embodiment, before the step 101, the UE also reports the capability indication information that supports the TTI handover to the RNC. For example, the UE may report the capability indication information in the RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message. .
步骤 102: 用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息。  Step 102: The user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station.
较佳地,基站是通过物理信令通知 UE执行 ΤΉ切换,例如通过 HS-SCCH order通知 UE执行 TTI切换。 当然, 在实际应用中, 也可以通过别的物理信 令或者非物理信令向 UE发送切换指示信息。关于基站如何决策何时发送切换 指示信息, 以及发送什么样的切换指示信息, 以及怎么利用高速共享控制信 道指令( HS-SCCH order )发送切换指示信息, 这部分将在后续描述基站侧的 具体实施方式时, 进行详细描述。  Preferably, the base station notifies the UE to perform the handover by physical signaling, for example, notifying the UE to perform the TTI handover by using the HS-SCCH order. Of course, in actual applications, the handover indication information may also be sent to the UE through another physical signaling or non-physical signaling. How the base station decides when to send the handover indication information, and what handover indication information is sent, and how to transmit the handover indication information by using the High Speed Shared Control Channel Command (HS-SCCH order), which will be described later on the base station side. In the case, a detailed description will be made.
需要说明的是, 该切换指示可以用于指示 UE在 R99 DCH和 E-DCH之 间进行切换, 但本发明是以 E-DCH TTI之间切换为例介绍。 It should be noted that the handover indication may be used to indicate that the UE is in the R99 DCH and the E-DCH. Switching is performed between, but the present invention is described by taking an example of switching between E-DCH TTIs.
步骤 103: 用户设备将当前 ΤΉ切换为与切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI, 其中, 目标 TTI为第一 TTI或第二 TTI。 即如果在切换前用户设备的 ΤΉ为 第一 ΤΉ, 那么目标 ΤΉ即为第二 TTI, 而如果在切换前用户设备的 ΤΉ为第 二 TTI, 那么目标 ΤΉ即为第一 TTI。  Step 103: The user equipment switches the current ΤΉ to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the target TTI is the first TTI or the second TTI. That is, if the user equipment's ΤΉ is the first 在 before the handover, the target ΤΉ is the second TTI, and if the user equipment's ΤΉ is the second TTI before the handover, the target ΤΉ is the first TTI.
步骤 104: 用户设备以目标 ΤΤΙ发送数据给基站。  Step 104: The user equipment sends data to the base station with the target ΤΤΙ.
例如, 假设第一 ΤΤΙ为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI为 lOmsTTI, 切换前用户设备 的 TTI为 2msTTI, 那么目标 TTI就为 lOmsTTI, 那么步骤 104具体为, 以 lOmsTTI发送上行数据给基站。  For example, if the first ΤΤΙ is 2msTTI, the second TTI is lOmsTTI, and the TTI of the user equipment before handover is 2msTTI, then the target TTI is lOmsTTI, then step 104 is specifically to send uplink data to the base station by lOmsTTI.
在实际应用中, 步骤 104具体有多种实施形态, 该部分将在后面进行详 细描述。  In practical applications, step 104 has various embodiments, which will be described in detail later.
通过上述步骤可以看出, 因为用户设备首先会接收不同 TTI分别的对应 的配置信息, 然后在接收到基站发送的切换指示信息之后, 就可以直接对用 户设备的当前 ΤΉ进行切换, 并切换至与切换指示信息对应的目标 ΤΉ, 并以 目标 TTI发送数据给基站, 所以不需要在切换的过程中, RNC再向基站发送 新的配置信息, 所以也就不需要 RNC和基站之间进行多次信令交互, 所以本 实施例中的 TTI切换过程及时, 时延较小, 所以避免了在 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI 切换时, E-DCH数据丟失或掉话, 同时因为能够及时执行 lOmsTTI向 2msTTI 的切换, 所以能够提高峰值速率。  It can be seen that the user equipment first receives the corresponding configuration information of different TTIs, and then after receiving the handover indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment can be directly switched and switched to The target ΤΉ corresponding to the indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by using the target TTI. Therefore, the RNC does not need to send new configuration information to the base station during the handover process, so that multiple times between the RNC and the base station are not required. Therefore, the TTI handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so that the E-DCH data is lost or dropped when the 2ms TTI is switched to the lOmsTTI, and because the lOmsTTI is switched to the 2ms TTI in time, Can increase the peak rate.
在具体实施过程中, 在步骤 102之后, 用户设备不发送确认信息给基站, 基站可通过重发切换指示信息保证用户设备接收到, 具体可通过设置重发的 时间段或重发次数,例如在 Is内连续重发切换指示信息,或者连续重发 3次。 而用户设备在接收到切换指示信息之后, 就紧接着执行步骤 103和步骤 104, 相应的, 基站在下发完切换指示信息之后就使用两套资源分别使用 2msTTI 和 lOmsTTI解析用户设备发送的 E-DCH上行数据。  In the specific implementation process, after the step 102, the user equipment does not send the acknowledgement information to the base station, and the base station can ensure that the user equipment receives the retransmission handover indication information, specifically by setting the time period of retransmission or the number of retransmissions, for example, The instruction information is continuously retransmitted within Is, or continuously retransmitted 3 times. After receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment immediately performs step 103 and step 104. Correspondingly, after the base station sends the handover indication information, the base station uses two sets of resources to parse the E-DCH sent by the user equipment by using 2ms TTI and 10msTTI respectively. Upstream data.
但在另一实施例中, 在步骤 102之后, 步骤 104之前, 该切换方法还包 括步骤 105: 用户设备发送确认信息给基站, 以告知基站用户设备已接收到或 者未接收到切换指示信息。 However, in another embodiment, after step 102, before step 104, the handover method further includes the step 105: the user equipment sends the acknowledgement information to the base station to notify the base station that the user equipment has received or The handover indication information is not received.
其中,步骤 105的第一种实施方式,用户设备反馈 ACK( Acknowledgment 正确认)信息或 NACK ( Negative Acknowledge 负确认)信息给基站。 如果 正确接收到切换指示信息, 那么用户设备就发送 ACK信息给基站, 如果没有 正确接收切换指示信息, 那么用户设备就发送 NACK信息给基站。  In the first implementation of step 105, the user equipment feeds back ACK (Acknowledgment Positive Acknowledgement) information or NACK (Negative Acknowledge Negative Acknowledgement) information to the base station. If the handover indication information is correctly received, the user equipment sends an ACK message to the base station. If the handover indication information is not correctly received, the user equipment sends a NACK message to the base station.
步骤 105 的第二种实施方式, 用户设备在 E-DPCCH 中携带禁止使用的 E-TFCI ( E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator , 增强专用传输信道格 式合并指示)来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息,其中,禁止使用的 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的或预留的。例如可以通过 RNC进行配置,比如使用 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS ( Transport Block Size , 传输块大小 )表中的禁止使用的 In a second implementation manner of step 105, the user equipment carries an E-TFCH (E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the E-DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information. , where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. For example, it can be configured through RNC, for example, using the 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS (Transport Block Size) table.
E-TFCL 再比如该 E-TFCI是预留的, 不能用于正常的数据传输, 只用于指示 用户正确收到切换指示信息。 E-TFCL For example, the E-TFCI is reserved and cannot be used for normal data transmission. It is only used to indicate that the user correctly receives the handover indication information.
步骤 105的第三种实施方式, 用户设备以目标 ΤΉ对应的 UL ( Uplink, 上行)扰码发送数据或控制信息, 以指示已正确接收到切换指示信息。 例如 在 RNC向用户设备预配第一配置信息和第二配置信息时,分别为两个 ΤΉ配 置两个 4尤码 SC1和 SC2; 以 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI切换为例, 当 UE正确收到 In a third implementation manner of step 105, the user equipment sends data or control information by using a UL (Uplink) scrambling code corresponding to the target 以 to indicate that the handover indication information has been correctly received. For example, when the RNC pre-configures the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the user equipment, two SUM codes SC1 and SC2 are configured for the two ΤΉ respectively; and the 2ms TTI is switched to the lOmsTTI as an example, when the UE correctly receives
HS-SCCH order后, 用 SC2发送上行 DPCCH, 基站检测到后, 使用目标 TTI 解析 E-DCH。 对服务基站来说, 下发完 HS-SCCH order后就需要分别使用两 套资源分别按照 SC1和 SC2尝试解析上行 DPCCH。 After the HS-SCCH order, the uplink DPCCH is sent by SC2, and after detecting by the base station, the E-DCH is parsed using the target TTI. For the serving base station, after the HS-SCCH order is sent, two sets of resources need to be used to separately parse the uplink DPCCH according to SC1 and SC2.
步骤 105的第四种实施方式,用户设备使用 DPCCH中的域信息来指示用 户设备已正确接收到切换指示信息。 比如可以使用 FBI ( feedback information, 反馈信息)对应的比特位来指示。  In a fourth implementation manner of step 105, the user equipment uses the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has correctly received the handover indication information. For example, the bit corresponding to the FBI (feedback information) can be used to indicate.
步骤 105 的第五种实施方式, 用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格 式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示用户设备已收到切换 指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  In a fifth implementation manner of step 105, the user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is a pre- Defined, or configurable.
比如当用户设备所有业务都承载在 E-DCH, 并且当前所用的 TTI类型为 For example, when all services of the user equipment are carried in the E-DCH, and the current TTI type is
E-DCH 10ms,这时 DPCCH中 TFCI域为 0;当 UE收到切换指示信息后( E-DCH 10ms ΤΉ切换为 DCH 10ms ΤΉ的切换指示信息), 则发送单独的携带非零 TFCI的 DPCCH来指示 UE收到切换指示信息;相应的基站检测到该 DPCCH 中的 TFCI为非零值, 则认为 UE正确收到切换指示信息, 该非零 TFCI是预 定义或可配置的。需要说明的是,这里所说的单独发送指 DPCCH信道单独发 送, 并没有伴随的专用物理数据信道(DPDCH ) 的信道发送。 E-DCH 10ms, in which the TFCI field in the DPCCH is 0; when the UE receives the handover indication information (E-DCH 10ms ΤΉ switch to DCH 10ms ΤΉ handover indication information), then send a separate DPCCH carrying non-zero TFCI to instruct the UE to receive handover indication information; if the corresponding base station detects that the TFCI in the DPCCH is non-zero, the UE is considered as The handover indication information is correctly received, and the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable. It should be noted that the separate transmission referred to herein refers to the DPCCH channel being separately transmitted, and there is no accompanying dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) channel transmission.
步骤 105 的第六种实施方式, 在本实施例中, 假设用户设备在接收基站 发送的切换指示信息之前, 还包括, 用户设备还发送功率余量(UPH )给基 站, 例如当用户设备的 UPH低于第一门限, 则用户设备向基站上报 UPH。  In the embodiment, in the embodiment, it is assumed that before the user equipment receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment further sends a power headroom (UPH) to the base station, for example, when the user equipment is UPH. If the threshold is lower than the first threshold, the user equipment reports the UPH to the base station.
在本实施例中, 步骤 105具体为: 当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 E-DCH 2ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送的 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则用户设备发送携带第一 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定 义的或可配置的; 或者,  In this embodiment, the step 105 is specifically: when the current location of the user equipment is an E-DCH 2ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication. (E-TFCI) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
当当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI,并且用户设备发送给基站的 UPH值大于第二阈 值, 则用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的 增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ),以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the user equipment sends an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI). ) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
当用户设备当前所用的 ΤΉ类型为 E-DCH 2ms TTI , 并且用户设备发送 的 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则用户设备在接收到 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms TTI 的切换指示信息后, 发送携带第一 E-TFCI 的 E-DPCCH, 以指示已接收到切 换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 需要说明的是, 当 UPH 小于第一阈值, 则说明用户处于功率受限或覆盖受限状态, 这时不可能使用 较高的速率传输 E-DCH数据, 即一般认为这时 E-TFCI值较小; 所以当 UE 收到 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms TTI的切换指示信息后, 发送携带第一 E-TFCI (该第一 E-TFCI值较大 ) 的 E-DPCCH, 就可以指示基站该 UE正确收到切 换指示信息。 相应的, 基站发送完 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms ΤΉ的切换指示 信息后, 检测到携带较大值的 E-TFCI (即第一 E-TFCI ) 的 E-DPCCH信道, 则认为 UE收到 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms 的 ΤΉ切换指示信息。 这里的第一 E-TFCI可以用于 E-DCH数据传输, 只是在 UPH小于第一阈值时, UE不选 择该第一 E-TFCI用于 E-DCH数据传输,所以 UE可以用该第一 E-TFCI来指 示收到基站发送的切换指示信息。 When the ΤΉ type used by the user equipment is E-DCH 2ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends the first indication after receiving the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to the 10ms TTI. An E-DPCCH of the E-TFCI, to indicate that the handover indication information has been received, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; it should be noted that when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the user is in power Limiting or covering the restricted state, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a higher rate, that is, it is generally considered that the E-TFCI value is smaller at this time; therefore, when the UE receives the E-DCH 2ms switch to the 10ms TTI switching indication After the information is sent, the E-DPCCH carrying the first E-TFCI (the first E-TFCI value is large) is sent, and the base station can be instructed to receive the handover indication information correctly. Correspondingly, after transmitting the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to 10ms E, the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI of the larger value (ie, the first E-TFCI), Then, it is considered that the UE receives the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to 10 ms. The first E-TFCI can be used for E-DCH data transmission, but when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the UE does not select the first E-TFCI for E-DCH data transmission, so the UE can use the first E. - TFCI to indicate the handover indication information sent by the base station.
当用户设备当前所用的 ΤΉ类型为 E-DCH 10ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送 的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则用户设备接收到切换指示信息后, 发送的携带第 二 E-TFCI 的 E-DPCCH, 以指示已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预 定义的或可配置的。 需要说明的是, 当 UPH大于第二阈值, 则说明用户处于 小区近点或中点位置, 这时不可能使用较小的速率传输 E-DCH数据, 即一般 认为这时 E-TFCI值较大;当 UE收到 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms的 ΤΉ切换指 示信息后, 发送携带第二 E-TFCI (该第二 E-TFCI值较小, 小于第一 E-TFCI ) 的 E-DPCCH。 相应的, 基站发送完 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms 的 ΤΉ切换指 示信息后, 检测到携带较小值的 E-TFCI的 E-DPCCH信道, 则认为 UE收到 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms 的 TTI切换消息。  When the ΤΉ type used by the user equipment is the E-DCH 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment is greater than the second threshold, after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment sends the E-DPCCH carrying the second E-TFCI, To indicate that the handover indication information has been received, the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable. It should be noted that when the UPH is greater than the second threshold, it indicates that the user is in the near-point or mid-point of the cell. At this time, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a smaller rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be larger at this time. After the UE receives the E-DCH 10ms switch to the 2ms handover indication information, the E-DPCCH carrying the second E-TFCI (the second E-TFCI value is smaller than the first E-TFCI) is sent. Correspondingly, after the E-DCH 10ms is switched to the 2ms handover indication information, the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI with a smaller value, and considers that the UE receives the E-DCH 10ms and switches to the TTI of 2ms. Switch messages.
另外, 不管步骤 105 以上述四种实施方式中的哪种方式给基站发送确认 信息, 用户设备在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给 基站, 其中, 最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 例如 RNC向用户设备配置一 个最大时间, 那么用户设备就在该最大时间内向基站反馈确认信息。  In addition, regardless of the manner in which the step 105 sends the acknowledgement information to the base station in the manner of the foregoing four implementation manners, the user equipment sends the acknowledgement information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined. Or configurable. For example, if the RNC configures a maximum time for the user equipment, the user equipment feeds back the confirmation information to the base station within the maximum time.
接下来, 将详细描述步骤 104的具体实施过程, 首先, 从步骤 104执行 的时机来讲, 如果目标 ΤΉ为第一 ΤΉ , 例如为 2msTTI时, 用户设备以第一 TTI发送数据给基站时, 用户设备在发送完确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用第 一 ΤΉ发送数据给基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的 整数; 而如果目标 ΤΉ为第二 TTI, 例如 lOmsTTI时, 用户设备以第二 TTI 发送数据给基站时, 用户设备在发送完确认信息后的下 N个 CFN后用第二 ΤΉ发送数据给基站, 其中 N为预定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零的整 数。  Next, the specific implementation process of step 104 will be described in detail. First, from the timing of step 104, if the target device is the first frame, for example, 2 ms TTI, when the user equipment sends data to the base station in the first TTI, the user The device sends data to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgment message is sent, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; and if the target ΤΉ is the second TTI, for example In the case of lOmsTTI, when the user equipment sends data to the base station by using the second TTI, the user equipment sends the data to the base station after the next N CFNs after the acknowledgement information is sent, where N is predefined or configurable, N Is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
其中, M和 N可配置, 例如是通过 RNC向用户设备配置的, 预定义为 在协议中固定的值。 Wherein, M and N are configurable, for example, configured by the RNC to the user equipment, and are predefined as A fixed value in the protocol.
其次, 从向用户面的处理方式的不同, 步骤 104具体有多种实施方式。 其中, 步骤 104的第一种实施方式, 首先在步骤 104之前, 用户设备清 除 HARQ ( Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request, 混合自动重传请求 )緩冲区中的 数据; 用户设备重置上行增强(MAC-i/is )实体。 其中, 重置 MAC-i/is实体, 具体例如是将 MAC层的变量 TSN ( Transmission Sequence Number,发送序列 号)重置为 0。 同时, 因为在 MAC层将数据清空了, 那么用户设备侧的 RLC ( Radio Link Control,无线链路控制 )层就接收不到网络侧发送的 RLC ACK, 那么就会在 RLC緩冲区中重新构建上行增强协议数据单元( MAC-i PDU ), 并重发 MAC-is/MAC-i PDU, 即执行了步骤 104。  Second, there are various embodiments of the step 104 in terms of the manner of processing to the user plane. In the first implementation of step 104, the user equipment first clears the data in the HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) buffer before the step 104; the user equipment resets the uplink enhancement (MAC-i) /is) entity. The MAC-i/is entity is reset, for example, the variable TSN (Transmission Sequence Number) of the MAC layer is reset to 0. At the same time, because the data is emptied at the MAC layer, the RLC (Radio Link Control) layer on the user equipment side does not receive the RLC ACK sent by the network side, and then it is reconstructed in the RLC buffer. The uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU), and the MAC-is/MAC-i PDU is retransmitted, that is, step 104 is performed.
同时为了避免 RNC侧 MAC-is根据 TSN排序出现乱序,需要在 E-DCH FP ( Frame Protocol, 帧协议 )或信令中携带上行增强实体重置( MAC-is Reset ) 指示或上行增强实体重置( MAC-i/is Reset )指示。  At the same time, in order to avoid the out-of-order ordering of the RNC-side MAC-is according to the TSN, the uplink enhanced entity reset (MAC-is Reset) indication or the uplink enhanced entity weight is required to be carried in the E-DCH FP (Frame Protocol) or signaling. Set (MAC-i/is Reset) indication.
步骤 104 的第二种实施方式, 用户设备删除未发送成功的切换前的 TTI 对应的第一上行增强协议数据单元( MAC-i PDU ); 用户设备构建目标 ΤΉ对 应的第二 MAC-i PDU,其中,在第二 MAC-i PDU中和在第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相同; 用户设备发送目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  In the second implementation manner of step 104, the user equipment deletes the first uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the pre-switched TTI that is not successfully transmitted; the user equipment constructs the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ,, The payload is the same in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU; the user equipment sends the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ.
如图 3所示, 在本实施方式中, 例如切换前的 ΤΉ为 2msTTI, 那么目标 TTI为 lOmsTTI, 那么就将未发送成功的 2ms TTI对应的 MAC-i PDU删除, 构建为 10ms TTI对应的 MAC-i PDU, 但有效载荷保持和 2msTTI—样, 但为 了匹配 10ms TTI TBS table ,需要在其中填 padding bit (填充位)。如图 3所示, 只要重传 TSN=2的 MAC-i PDU, 假设 2msTTI的有效载荷是 160bit, 但为了 匹配 lOmsTTI的 TBS table, 假设 lOmsTTI的 TBS table的载荷是 166bit, 那 么就在第二 MAC-i PDU填填充位, 即 6bit, 但有效载荷还是 160bit。  As shown in FIG. 3, in this embodiment, for example, the ΤΉ before handover is 2 ms TTI, and then the target TTI is 10 ms TTI, then the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the 2 ms TTI that has not been successfully transmitted is deleted, and the MAC corresponding to the 10 ms TTI is constructed. -i PDU, but the payload remains the same as 2msTTI, but in order to match the 10ms TTI TBS table, padding bits need to be filled in. As shown in FIG. 3, as long as the MAC-i PDU of TSN=2 is retransmitted, the payload of the 2ms TTI is assumed to be 160 bits, but in order to match the TBS table of lOmsTTI, it is assumed that the payload of the TBS table of lOmsTTI is 166 bits, then the second MAC The -i PDU fills in the padding, which is 6bit, but the payload is still 160bit.
同时 TSN不重置, 保持和 2msTTI时一致。 因此, 在本实施例中, 不需 要触发 RLC层的重传。  At the same time, the TSN does not reset and remains consistent with the 2msTTI. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to trigger retransmission of the RLC layer.
步骤 104 的第三种实施方式, 用户设备在物理层将未发送成功的切换前 的 TTI对应的第一数据编码为目标 ΤΉ对应的第二数据; 用户设备发送第二 数据。 In a third implementation manner of step 104, the user equipment is not successfully sent before the physical layer switches. The first data corresponding to the TTI is encoded as the second data corresponding to the target ;; the user equipment sends the second data.
即在本实施例中, 未发送成功的 2msTTI的 MAC-i PDU不删除, 而是在 物理层通过编码编码到 lOmsTTI, 该方法要求第一 TTI和第二 TTI是用相同 的 TBS table。  That is, in this embodiment, the MAC-i PDU of the 2ms TTI that has not been successfully transmitted is not deleted, but is encoded and encoded into the lOmsTTI at the physical layer. The method requires that the first TTI and the second TTI use the same TBS table.
同时 TSN不重置, 保持和 2msTTI时一致。 本实施例中的方法不需要触 发 RLC层重传。  At the same time, the TSN does not reset and remains consistent with the 2msTTI. The method in this embodiment does not require triggering RLC layer retransmission.
步骤 104 的第四种实施方式, 用户设备收到切换指示信息后, 不清除 HARQ buffer 中的数据, 将 HARQ buffer 中的数据按照目标 TTI类型构建 MAC-i PDU,发送给基站; 并且重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN重置为 0.。 同时 为了避免 RNC侧 MAC-is根据 TSN排序出现乱序,需要在 E-DCH FP ( Frame Protocol , 帧协议 )或信令中携带 MAC-is reset指示或 MAC-i/is reset指示。  In a fourth implementation manner of step 104, after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment does not clear the data in the HARQ buffer, constructs the MAC-i PDU according to the target TTI type, and sends the data to the base station according to the target TTI type, and sends the MAC address to the base station; -i/is entity, reset TSN to 0. At the same time, in order to avoid the out-of-order ordering of the RNC-side MAC-is according to the TSN, the MAC-is reset indication or the MAC-i/is reset indication needs to be carried in the E-DCH FP (Frame Protocol) or signaling.
在另一实施例中, 用户设备在接收到切换指示信息后, 向用户面的处理 方式为: 收到切换指示信息后, 不构建新的 MAC-i PDU, 同时不清除现有的 HARQ緩冲区中的数据; 当已有 HARQ緩冲区中的数据传输完毕时, 用户 设备发送对该切换指示信息的确认信息; 用户设备在发送完确认信息后的下 一个 CF 切换到 lOmsTTI;基站在收到确认信息后的下一个 CF 认为切换到 10msTTI。 即如前面所描述, 用户设备侧预定义或被配置有一个最大时间, 在 该最大时间内, 用户设备在最大时间内将 HARQ緩冲区中的数据传输完毕, 再发送确认信息给基站。  In another embodiment, after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment processes the information to the user plane: after receiving the handover indication information, the new MAC-i PDU is not constructed, and the existing HARQ buffer is not cleared. The data in the area; when the data transmission in the existing HARQ buffer is completed, the user equipment sends the confirmation information of the handover indication information; the user equipment switches to the lOmsTTI after the next CF after the confirmation information is sent; The next CF after the confirmation message is considered to switch to 10msTTI. That is, as described above, the user equipment side is predefined or configured with a maximum time during which the user equipment transmits the data in the HARQ buffer in the maximum time, and then sends an acknowledgement message to the base station.
实施例二  Embodiment 2
在本实施例中, 将从基站侧对 ΤΉ切换方法进行描述, 请参考图 4所示, 该方法包括:  In this embodiment, the method for switching from the base station side is described. Referring to FIG. 4, the method includes:
步骤 201:基站接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 配置信息。  Step 201: The base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first port and the second configuration information corresponding to the second port.
在具体实施过程中, 步骤 201具体为: 基站接收 RNC发送的第一 ΤΉ对 应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息。 其中, RNC可通过无线 链路重配过程向基站发送第一 ΤΉ和第二 ΤΉ分别对应的资源配置信息。 进一步, 步骤 201与步骤 101类似, RNC向基站发送第一配置信息和第 二配置信息的过程可以是同时的, 也可以不是同时的, 具体过程请参考对步 骤 101的描述, 在这里不再赘述。 In a specific implementation process, the step 201 is specifically: the base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first 发送 sent by the RNC and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI. Among them, RNC can be wireless The link reconfiguration process sends the resource configuration information corresponding to the first ΤΉ and the second 向 to the base station. Further, the step 201 is similar to the step 101. The process of the RNC sending the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the base station may be the same or not. For details, refer to the description of step 101. .
在进一步的实施例中, 当 RNC在同时发送第一配置信息和第二配置信息 给基站时, 同时还指定 UE当前使用的 ΤΉ类型, 在通常情况下, 为了防止掉 话, RNC会指定 UE当前使用的 ΤΉ为 10msTTI。  In a further embodiment, when the RNC sends the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the base station at the same time, the ΤΉ type currently used by the UE is also specified. In general, in order to prevent dropped calls, the RNC specifies the current UE. The ΤΉ used is 10msTTI.
进一步, RNC发送的第一配置信息和第二配置信息中,分别包含各个 TTI 对应的一套 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数,即第一 TTI对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数,第二配置信息包括第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数; 进一步,还可以包含其他参数,例如为第一 TTI和第二 TTI分别配置一套 DTX ( Discontinuous Transmission, 不连续发送)参数和 /或 DRX ( Discontinuous Reception, 不连续接收)参数, 本申请不作限定。  Further, the first configuration information and the second configuration information sent by the RNC respectively include a set of E-DCH MAC-d flow parameters corresponding to each TTI, that is, a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI, The second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ;; further, other parameters may be included, for example, a set of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) is configured for the first TTI and the second TTI, respectively. The parameters and/or DRX (Discontinuous Reception) parameters are not limited in this application.
进一步, 第一配置信息和 /或第二配置信息包括但不限於用于确定用户设 备发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率; 其中, ΤΉ切换指示确 认信息用来指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息。  Further, the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information includes, but is not limited to, determining, by the user equipment, the power of the control channel that includes the handover indication acknowledgement information, where the handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received Switch the indication information.
较佳的, 在另一实施例中, 在步骤 201 之前, 基站还向 RNC上报支持 TTI切换的能力指示信息, 例如基站可以在 Audit Response (审计响应 ) 消息 中上报该能力指示信息。  Preferably, in another embodiment, before the step 201, the base station also reports the capability indication information for supporting the TTI handover to the RNC. For example, the base station may report the capability indication information in the Audit Response message.
步骤 202: 基站向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息, 以使用户设备 能够执行步骤 103。  Step 202: The base station sends the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment, so that the user equipment can perform step 103.
在具体实施过程中,基站通过物理信令通知 UE执行 TTI切换,例如通过 HS-SCCH order通知 UE执行 ΤΉ切换。 当然, 在实际应用中, 也可以通过别 的物理信令或者非物理信令向 UE发送切换指示信息。  In a specific implementation process, the base station notifies the UE to perform a TTI handover through physical signaling, for example, notifying the UE to perform the handover by using the HS-SCCH order. Of course, in actual applications, the handover indication information may also be sent to the UE through other physical signaling or non-physical signaling.
如表一所示, 为当前已经使用的 HS-SCCH order组合:
Figure imgf000040_0001
从表一可以看出 Xeodtl , Xeodt2为 11 并且 Xodtl , Xodt2, Xodt3为 010 (或 011、 100等)可以用作 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。
As shown in Table 1, the current HS-SCCH order combination has been used:
Figure imgf000040_0001
It can be seen from Table 1 that Xeodtl, Xeodt2 is 11 and Xodtl, Xodt2, and Xodt3 are 010 (or 011, 100, etc.) can be used as switching indication information for ΤΉ switching.
进一步, 优选的, 该 HS-SCCH order能由 E-DCH RLS set中用户设备的 服务 E-DCH小区触发。  Further, preferably, the HS-SCCH order can be triggered by the serving E-DCH cell of the user equipment in the E-DCH RLS set.
在具体实施过程中, 在步骤 202之前, 该方法还包括: 基站判断用户设 备是否需要进行 TTI切换, 获得第一判断结果; 当第一判断结果表示用户设 备需要进行 ΤΉ切换时, 基站生成切换指示信息。  In a specific implementation, before the step 202, the method further includes: determining, by the base station, whether the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, and obtaining a first determination result; when the first determination result indicates that the user equipment needs to perform handover, the base station generates a handover indication. information.
在实际运用中, 基站决策用户设备是否需要进行 TTI切换, 可以通过多 种方式实现。  In actual use, the base station determines whether the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, which can be implemented in various ways.
第一实施方式, 如果用户设备当前的 ΤΉ为 2msTTI, 那么就判断 UPH 是否低于第一门限,和 /或上行数据速率(或当前 ΤΉ 用户设备选择的 E-TFCI ) 是否低于第二门限, 如果 UPH低于第一门限, 和 /或上行数据速率 (或当前 TTI 用户设备选择的 E-TFCI )低于第二门限, 那么就表示用户设备需要进行 TTI切换, 并且是触发 2msTTI到 lOmsTTI的切换。  In the first embodiment, if the current ΤΉ of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, it is determined whether the UPH is lower than the first threshold, and/or the uplink data rate (or the current E-TFCI selected by the user equipment) is lower than the second threshold. If the UPH is lower than the first threshold, and/or the uplink data rate (or the E-TFCI selected by the current TTI user equipment) is lower than the second threshold, it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform TTI handover, and triggers switching from 2msTTI to lOmsTTI. .
第二实施方式, 如果用户设备当前的 TTI为 2msTTI, 那么基站就统计 Y 个 ΤΉ中是否有 X个 ΤΉ内用户设备上报的 UPH均低于第三门限,其中, Y、 Ν均为大于等于 1的整数,Χ小于等于 Υ;和 /或上行数据速率(或当前 ΤΉ 用 户设备选择的 E-TFCI )是否低于第二门限; 如果 Υ个 ΤΤΙ中有 X个 ΤΉ内 用户设备上报的 UPH均低于第三门限, 和 /或上行数据速率 (或当前 ΤΉ 用 户设备选择的 E-TFCI )低于第二门限, 那么就表示用户设备需要进行 ΤΉ切 换, 并且是触发 2msTTI到 lOmsTTI的切换。  In the second embodiment, if the current TTI of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, the base station counts whether the number of UPHs reported by the user equipments in the X Y are lower than the third threshold, where Y and Ν are both greater than or equal to 1 The integer is Χ less than or equal to Υ; and/or the uplink data rate (or the current E-TFCI selected by the user equipment) is lower than the second threshold; if there are X ΤΉ, the UPH reported by the user equipment is low. At the third threshold, and/or the uplink data rate (or the E-TFCI selected by the current user equipment) is lower than the second threshold, it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the handover of 2ms TTI to 10msTTI.
其中, 在上述两种实施方式中, 第一门限和第三门限可以相同, 也可以 不同。  In the foregoing two implementation manners, the first threshold and the third threshold may be the same or different.
第三实施方式, 如果用户设备当前的 TTI为 lOmsTTI , 那么就判断 UPH 是否高于第四门限, 和 /或用户设备上报的 TEBS (緩冲区大小)是否高于第 五门限,如果 UPH高于第四门限,和 /或用户设备上报的 TEBS高于第五门限, 那么就表示用户设备需要进行 ΤΉ切换, 并且是触发 lOmsTTI到 2msTTI的 切换。 In the third embodiment, if the current TTI of the user equipment is 10 msTTI, it is determined whether the UPH is higher than the fourth threshold, and/or the TEBS (buffer size) reported by the user equipment is higher than the fifth threshold, if the UPH is higher than The fourth threshold, and/or the TEBS reported by the user equipment is higher than the fifth threshold, then the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the lOmsTTI to 2msTTI. Switch.
第四实施方式, 如果用户设备当前的 ΤΉ为 lOmsTTI, 那么基站统计 S 个 ΤΉ中是否有 P个 ΤΉ内用户设备上报的 UPH均高于第六门限, 其中, S、 P均为大于等于 1的整数, P小于等于 S , 和 /或用户设备上报的 TEBS高于第 五门限,如果 S个 ΤΉ中是否有 P个 TTI内用户设备上报的 UPH均高于第六 门限, 和 /或用户设备上报的 TEBS高于第五门限, 那么就表示用户设备需要 进行 ΤΉ切换, 并且是触发 lOmsTTI到 2msTTI的切换。  In the fourth embodiment, if the current ΤΉ of the user equipment is 10 msTTI, the base station counts whether the UPHs reported by the user equipments in the S 高于 are higher than the sixth threshold, where S and P are both greater than or equal to 1. The integer value, P is less than or equal to S, and/or the TEBS reported by the user equipment is higher than the fifth threshold. If the number of UPHs reported by the user equipment in the P-TTIs is higher than the sixth threshold, and/or the user equipment reports The TEBS is higher than the fifth threshold, then it indicates that the user equipment needs to perform the handover, and triggers the handover of lOmsTTI to 2msTTI.
其中, 在上述第三实施方式和第四实施方式中, 第四门限和第六门限可 以相同, 也可以不同。 而在上述四种方式中, 第一门限和第四门限可以相同, 也可以不同, 而第三门限和第六门限可以相同, 也可以不同。  In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the fourth threshold and the sixth threshold may be the same or different. In the above four manners, the first threshold and the fourth threshold may be the same or different, and the third threshold and the sixth threshold may be the same or different.
当然, 在实际运用中, 基站也可以通过其他参数或算法来决策是否执行 ΤΉ切换, 本申请不作限定。  Of course, in actual application, the base station may also determine whether to perform the handover by using other parameters or algorithms, which is not limited in this application.
当基站决策要执行 ΤΉ切换, 那么就生成切换指示信息, 然后执行步骤 When the base station decides to perform the handover, the handover indication information is generated, and then the steps are performed.
202。 202.
在进一步的实施例中, 该方法还包括步骤 203: 基站接收用户设备发送的 确认信息。 其中, 步骤 203 中基站接收的确认信息与用户设备发送的确认信 息对应, 而确认信息在前述实施例一中描述用户设备侧的方法时, 已详细描 述过, 所以在此不再赘述。  In a further embodiment, the method further comprises the step 203: the base station receiving the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment. The acknowledgment information received by the eNB in step 203 corresponds to the acknowledgment information sent by the user equipment, and the acknowledgment information is described in detail in the foregoing method in the first embodiment, and is not described here.
进一步, 如果在最大时间内, 基站未接收到确认信息, 则重新发送切换 指示信息, 即, 重复执行步骤 202 , 其中, 最大时间为预定义的或可配置的, 例如 RNC向基站配置一个最大时间, 那么基站就在该最大时间内向基站反馈 确认信息。 在本实施例中, RNC为用户设备配置的最大时间和为基站配置的 最大时间是相同的。  Further, if the base station does not receive the acknowledgment information in the maximum time, the handover indication information is resent, that is, the step 202 is repeatedly performed, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable, for example, the RNC configures the base station with a maximum time. Then, the base station feeds back the confirmation information to the base station within the maximum time. In this embodiment, the maximum time that the RNC is configured for the user equipment and the maximum time configured for the base station are the same.
在进一步实施例中, 在步骤 202之后, 在步骤 203之前或之后, 该方法 还包括步骤 204:基站向 RNC发送 MAC-i/is Reset指示或 MAC-is Reset指示, 以使 RNC将 TSN置为 0。  In a further embodiment, after step 202, before or after step 203, the method further comprises the step 204: the base station sends a MAC-i/is Reset indication or a MAC-is Reset indication to the RNC, so that the RNC sets the TSN to 0.
在进一步的实施例中, 在步骤 202之后, 在步骤 203之前或之后, 该方 法还包括步骤 205: 基站发送用户设备的切换后的目标 TTI给 RNC。 以告知 RNC用户设备当前的 ΤΉ的类型。 例如可以通过 FP帧或信令(比如 RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION 或 RADIO LINK PARAMETER UPDATE INDICATION ) 来指示。 In a further embodiment, after step 202, before or after step 203, the party The method further includes the step 205: the base station sends the switched target TTI of the user equipment to the RNC. To inform the RNC user device of the current type of defect. For example, it can be indicated by FP frame or signaling (such as RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION or RADIO LINK PARAMETER UPDATE INDICATION).
在进一步的实施例中, 在步骤 202之后, 在步骤 203之前或之后, 该方 法还包括: 利用目标 ΤΉ解析用户设备发送的上行数据。  In a further embodiment, after step 202, before or after step 203, the method further comprises: parsing the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target ΤΉ.
为了兼容现有技术中的 RRC信令触发的 ΤΉ切换流程, 同时为了保证只 有一个节点控制 ΤΉ切换; 允许 RNC关掉基站触发的 ΤΉ切换方式, 然后由 RNC来控制 TTI的切换, 例如在用户设备移动的软切换区域时, 就通知基站 关闭基站触发的 TTI切换。 因此, 基站具有关闭 TTI切换的工作模式和开启 TTI切换的工作模式, 而在基站处于开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 执行步骤 202。  In order to be compatible with the RRC signaling triggered handover procedure in the prior art, and to ensure that only one node controls the handover, the RNC is allowed to turn off the handover mode triggered by the base station, and then the RNC controls the handover of the TTI, for example, in the user equipment. When the soft handoff area is moved, the base station is notified to turn off the base station triggered TTI handover. Therefore, the base station has an operation mode for turning off the TTI handover and an operation mode for turning on the TTI handover, and in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover, step 202 is performed.
进一步,基站接收无线网络控制器发送的指示信息, 并将基站由关闭 TTI 切换的工作模式切换为开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 或将基站由开启 ΤΉ切换 的工作模式切换为关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。  Further, the base station receives the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and switches the working mode of the base station from the TTI switch-off to the operation mode of the switch-on, or switches the work mode of the base station from the switch to the switch mode. .
在实际运用中, RNC具有但不限于以下两种指示信息的发送方式: 第一种, 通过重配消息中包含或不包含预配 ΤΉ的相关配置信息来指示; 第二种, 通过重配消息中增加一个显示开关指示, 当要关闭基站的 TTI 切换工作模式时, 预配 ΤΉ的相关配置信息可以不删除。  In practical applications, the RNC has, but is not limited to, the following two types of indication information: The first type is indicated by reconfiguring the related configuration information with or without the pre-configured message; the second type is by re-allocating the message. A display switch indication is added. When the TTI switching mode of the base station is to be turned off, the configuration information of the provisioning port may not be deleted.
例如 RNC通过 RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST/Response 指示基站关闭 TTI切换, 可选的,基站在 RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION For example, the RNC instructs the base station to turn off the TTI switch by RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST/Response. Optionally, the base station is in RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION
Response中反馈该用户设备当前使用的目标 ΤΉ类型。 The Response feeds back the target ΤΉ type currently used by the user device.
进一步, 为了应用于软切换领域, 在步骤 202 的同时或之后, 该方法还 包括: 基站向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使无线网络控制器发送指示信 息给非服务基站, 以使非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTI。  Further, in order to be applied to the soft handover domain, the method further includes: transmitting, by the base station, indication information to the radio network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station Switch to the target TTI after switching.
优选地, 在该指示信息中包含切换至目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。  Preferably, the indication information includes time information switched to the target ΤΉ.
以下再通过一个具体的例子来说明本发明中的 ΤΉ切换方法, 先假设基 站处于开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 请参考图 5所示, 该方法包括: 步骤 301 : UE和基站向 RNC上报支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示; The following is a specific example to illustrate the chirp switching method in the present invention. The station is in the working mode of the on/off switch. Referring to FIG. 5, the method includes: Step 301: The UE and the base station report the capability indication for supporting the handover to the RNC.
步骤 302: RNC侧决策预配 ΤΤΙ;  Step 302: RNC side decision pre-matching ΤΤΙ;
步骤 303: UE和基站初始配置 2msTTI配置参数, 预配 lOmsTTI配置参 数;  Step 303: The UE and the base station initially configure the 2ms TTI configuration parameter, and pre-configure the lOmsTTI configuration parameter.
步骤 304: 基站决策触发 2msTTI切换到 lOmsTTI;  Step 304: The base station determines to trigger the 2ms TTI to switch to lOmsTTI;
步骤 305: 基站发送 HS-SCCH order触发 ΤΉ切换;  Step 305: The base station sends an HS-SCCH order trigger switch.
步骤 306: UE进行 ΤΉ切换;  Step 306: The UE performs a handover;
步骤 307: UE向基站反馈确认信息;  Step 307: The UE feeds back confirmation information to the base station.
步骤 308: 基站向 RNC发送 MAC-is reset指示, 可选的, 还可以是发送 或 MAC-i/is Reset指示;  Step 308: The base station sends a MAC-is reset indication to the RNC. Optionally, it may also be a sending or MAC-i/is Reset indication.
步骤 309: 基站向 RNC反馈当前使用的 TTI;  Step 309: The base station feeds back to the RNC the currently used TTI.
步骤 310: RNC决策关闭基站触发的 TTI切换;  Step 310: The RNC decides to disable the TTI handover triggered by the base station.
步骤 311 : RNC通知基站关掉 ΤΉ切换;  Step 311: The RNC notifies the base station to turn off the handover;
步骤 312: 基站关闭 ΤΉ切换, 可选的, 还向 RNC反馈当前使用的 TTI; 步骤 313: RNC控制 ΤΉ切换。  Step 312: The base station is turned off, and optionally, the current used TTI is also fed back to the RNC; Step 313: The RNC controls the handover.
其中, 步骤 301-步骤 312均在实施例一实施例二中进行了详细的描述, 所以在此不再赘述, 而步骤 313 , 请参考图 1中的方法流程。  The steps 301 to 312 are described in detail in the second embodiment of the first embodiment, and therefore are not described here. For the step 313, refer to the method flow in FIG.
需要说明的是, 还可以是 RNC决策执行 ΤΉ切换, 发送切换指示信息给 基站; 基站同上述方式发送切换指示信息给 UE, 后续步骤与上述方案相同。 该方案的有益效果是减少了基站和 RNC侧的信令交互,比如现有技术中 RNC 通过 RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE 、 RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready、 Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm通知基站执 行 TTI切换, 在本方案中, 只需要一条信令通知基站执行 ΤΉ切换。 因此, 同样可以解决现有技术中 ΤΉ切换时延较大的技术问题。  It should be noted that the RNC may perform the handover and send the handover indication information to the base station. The base station sends the handover indication information to the UE in the foregoing manner, and the subsequent steps are the same as the foregoing solution. The scheme has the beneficial effects of reducing the signaling interaction between the base station and the RNC side. For example, in the prior art, the RNC notifies the base station to perform TTI handover through the RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE, the RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION Ready, and the Radio Link Reconfiguration Confirm. In this solution, only A signaling is required to inform the base station to perform a handover. Therefore, the technical problem that the switching delay is large in the prior art can also be solved.
另外, 在本方案中 RNC可以同时通知 E-DCH RLS set中非服务基站执行 TTI切换。 实施例三 In addition, in this solution, the RNC can simultaneously notify the non-serving base station in the E-DCH RLS set to perform TTI handover. Embodiment 3
基于同一设计思路, 本发明实施例还提供一种用户设备, 如图 6所示, 该用户设备包括: 第一接收单元 401 ,用于接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息 和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置信息; 第二接收单元 402,用于接收基站发送的切 换指示信息, 并将切换指示信息发送给切换单元 403; 切换单元 403 , 用于从 第二接收单元 402接收切换指示信息, 以及将当前 ΤΉ切换为与切换指示信 息对应的目标 TTI, 其中, 当前 TTI为第一 TTI和第二 TTI其中之一, 目标 TTI为第一 TTI和第二 TTI的另一个; 第一发送单元 404, 用于以目标 TTI 发送数据给基站。  Based on the same design, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a user equipment. As shown in FIG. 6, the user equipment includes: a first receiving unit 401, configured to receive first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and corresponding to the second UI The second receiving unit 402 is configured to receive the switching indication information sent by the base station, and send the switching indication information to the switching unit 403. The switching unit 403 is configured to receive the switching indication information from the second receiving unit 402. And the current ΤΉ is switched to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target TTI is another one of the first TTI and the second TTI; the first sending unit 404 , used to send data to the base station with the target TTI.
较佳的, 第一 TTI具体为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI具体为 10msTTI。  Preferably, the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
较佳的, 用户设备还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于发送确认信息给基站。 在第一实施方式中, 第二发送单元具体用于反馈 ACK信息或 NACK信 息给基站。  Preferably, the user equipment further includes: a second sending unit, configured to send the acknowledgement information to the base station. In the first embodiment, the second sending unit is specifically configured to feed back ACK information or NACK information to the base station.
在第二实施方式中,第二发送单元具体用于在 E-DPCCH中携带禁止使用 的 E-TFCI来指示用户设备已收到目标 TTI, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预 定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或  In the second implementation, the second sending unit is specifically configured to carry the E-TFCI that is prohibited from being used in the E-DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the target TTI, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or Configured or reserved; or
用于发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信 道(DPCCH ) 来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预 定义的, 或可配置的。  For transmitting a separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
在第三实施方式中, 第二发送单元具体用于以目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码 发送控制信息或数据, 以指示已接收到切换指示信息。  In the third embodiment, the second sending unit is specifically configured to send the control information or data by using the uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target , to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
在第四实施方式中,第二发送单元具体用于使用 DPCCH中的域信息来指 示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息。  In the fourth embodiment, the second sending unit is specifically configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
在第五种实施方式中, 第二发送单元, 用于当当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且 用户设备发送给基站的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一增 强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定 义的或可配置的; 或者, In a fifth implementation manner, the second sending unit is configured to: when the current UI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and the sending carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format. An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is a reservation Meaningful or configurable; or,
当当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量( UPH ) 值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信 息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current time is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E -DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
进一步, 不管以上述哪种实施方式发送确认信息, 第二发送单元具体用 于在接收到切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给基站, 其中, 最大 时间为预定义的或可配置的。  Further, regardless of which embodiment is used to send the acknowledgment information, the second sending unit is specifically configured to send the acknowledgment information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
较佳的, 第一发送单元 404具体用于: 当以第一 TTI发送数据给基站时, 第一发送单元 404在第二发送单元发送完确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用第一 ΤΉ发送数据给基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的整 数;  Preferably, the first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to: when transmitting data to the base station by using the first TTI, the first sending unit 404 sends the first frame after the next M subframes after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgement information. Data to the base station, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero;
当以第二 ΤΉ发送数据给基站时, 第一发送单元 404在第二发送单元发 送完确认信息后的下 N个 CFN后用第二 ΤΉ发送数据给基站, 其中 N为预 定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零的整数。 例如, 第一 ΤΉ为 2msTTI, 第 二 ΤΉ为 lOmsTTI, 那么, 如果目标 TTI为第一 ΤΉ时, 即 2msTTI, 那么即 是从 lOmsTTI切换过来的, 所以在发送完确认信息后的下 M个子帧, 例如下 个子帧就可以使用 2msTTI发送数据给基站; 如果目标 ΤΉ为第二 ΤΉ, 即 lOmsTTI, 那么即是从 2msTTI切换为 lOmsTTI, 所以在发完确认信息后的下 N个 CF , 例如下个 CF 后就可以用 1 OmsTTI发送数据给基站。  When the data is sent to the base station by using the second ΤΉ, the first sending unit 404 sends the data to the base station by using the second ΤΉ after the second sending unit sends the acknowledgment information, where N is predefined or configurable. , N is an integer greater than or equal to zero. For example, if the first ΤΉ is 2 ms TTI and the second ΤΉ is 10 ms TTI, then if the target TTI is the first ,, that is, 2 ms TTI, then it is switched from 10 ms TTI, so after the acknowledgment message is sent, the next M subframes, For example, the next subframe can use 2msTTI to send data to the base station; if the target ΤΉ is the second ΤΉ, that is, lOmsTTI, then it is switched from 2msTTI to lOmsTTI, so the next N CFs after the confirmation message is sent, for example, the next CF The data can then be sent to the base station using 1 OmsTTI.
较佳的, 用户设备还包括: 处理单元, 用于在第一发送单元 404 以目标 TTI发送数据给基站之前, 清除 HARQ緩冲区中的数据; 并重置 MAC-i/is实 体。其中,重置 MAC-i/is实体,具体例如是将 MAC层的变量 TSN( Transmission Sequence Number, 发送序列号)重置为 0。 同时, 因为在 MAC层将数据清空 了, 那么用户设备侧的 RLC ( Radio Link Control, 无线链路控制 )层就接收 不到网络侧发送的 RLC ACK , 那么就会在 RLC 緩冲区中重新构建 MAC-is/MAC-i PDU, 并重发 MAC-is/MAC-i PDU, 即第一发送单元 404以目 标 TTI发送数据给基站。 Preferably, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to: before the first sending unit 404 sends the data to the base station by using the target TTI, clear the data in the HARQ buffer; and reset the MAC-i/is entity. The MAC-i/is entity is reset, for example, the variable TSN (Transmission Sequence Number) of the MAC layer is reset to 0. At the same time, because the data is emptied at the MAC layer, the RLC (Radio Link Control) layer on the user equipment side does not receive the RLC ACK sent by the network side, and then it is reconstructed in the RLC buffer. MAC-is/MAC-i PDU, and retransmitting the MAC-is/MAC-i PDU, that is, the first sending unit 404 The standard TTI transmits data to the base station.
在另一实施例中, 第一发送单元 404具体用于: 删除未发送成功的切换 前的 TTI对应的第一 M AC-i PDU;构建目标 TTI对应的第二 M AC-i PDU ,其 中, 在第二 MAC-i PDU中和在第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相同; 并发送 目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  In another embodiment, the first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to: delete a first M AC-i PDU corresponding to a TTI that is not successfully transmitted before the handover; and construct a second M AC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where In the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; and the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI is transmitted.
在再一实施例中, 当在第一 ΤΉ下和在第二 ΤΉ下, 使用相同的 TBS表 时, 用户设备还包括: 编码单元, 用于在物理层将未发送成功的第一 TTI对 应的第一数据编码为第二 ΤΉ对应的第二数据, 并将第二数据发送给第一发 送单元 404; 第一发送单元 404具体用于从编码单元接收第二数据, 并发送第 二数据。  In a further embodiment, when the same TBS table is used under the first frame and the second frame, the user equipment further includes: a coding unit, configured to correspond to the first TTI that is not successfully sent in the physical layer. The first data is encoded as the second data corresponding to the second frame, and the second data is sent to the first sending unit 404. The first sending unit 404 is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit and send the second data.
在进一步的实施例中, 用户设备还包括: 处理单元, 用于在第二接收单 元 402接收到基站发送的切换指示信息后, 将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为 目标 ΤΉ对应的 MAC-i PDU; 并重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  In a further embodiment, the user equipment further includes: a processing unit, configured to, after the second receiving unit 402 receives the handover indication information sent by the base station, construct the data in the HARQ buffer as the MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ ; and reset the MAC-i/is entity, setting TSN to 0.
较佳的, 用户设备还包括: 第三发送单元, 用于发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能 力指示信息。 具体例如是在第一接收单元 401接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置 信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置信息之前, 第三发送单元发送支持 ΤΉ切换 的能力指示信息给 RNC。  Preferably, the user equipment further includes: a third sending unit, configured to send capability indication information that supports the handover. For example, before the first receiving unit 401 receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, the third sending unit sends the capability indication information supporting the handover to the RNC.
较佳的, 第二接收单元 402具体用于接收基站发送的 HS-SCCH order, 即 切换指示信息用 HS-SCCH order来表示。  Preferably, the second receiving unit 402 is specifically configured to receive the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station, that is, the handover indication information is represented by an HS-SCCH order.
在上述各实施例中, 第一配置信息包括第一 TTI 对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数,第二配置信息包括第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow 参数。  In the foregoing embodiments, the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI, and the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ΤΉ.
进一步, 第一配置信息还包括第一 TTI对应的第一 DTX参数和 /或第一 DRX参数,第二配置信息还包括第二 TTI对应的第二 DTX参数和 /或第二 DRX 参数。  Further, the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI, and the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
在以上实施例中, 第一接收单元 401和第二接收单元 402具体可以是同 一个, 也可以是不同的接收单元; 而第一发送单元 404至第三发送单元可以 是相同的发送单元, 也可以是两两互不相同的发送单元。 In the above embodiment, the first receiving unit 401 and the second receiving unit 402 may be the same one, or may be different receiving units; and the first sending unit 404 to the third sending unit may It is the same sending unit, and it can also be a sending unit that is different from each other.
在以上各实施例中, 在不冲突的情况下, 可以相互组合实施。  In the above embodiments, they may be implemented in combination with each other without conflict.
前述图 2实施例中的 ΤΉ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的用户设备, 通过前述对 TTI切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技 术人员可以清楚的知道本实施例中用户设备的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的 筒洁, 在此不再详述。  The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing method for switching the ΤΉ in the embodiment of FIG. 2 are also applicable to the user equipment in this embodiment. Through the foregoing detailed description of the TTI switching method, those skilled in the art can clearly understand the embodiment. The implementation method of the user equipment, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
实施例四  Embodiment 4
本实施例提供一种用户设备, 请参考图 7所示, 为用户设备的硬件实现 示例的概念图, 该用户设备包括:  This embodiment provides a user equipment. Referring to FIG. 7, a conceptual diagram of an example implementation of hardware of a user equipment, where the user equipment includes:
接收器 503 ,用于接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第 二配置信息; 并接收基站发送的切换指示信息; 处理器 501 , 用于基于切换指 示信息, 将当前 ΤΉ切换为与切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI, 其中, 当前 TTI 为第一 ΤΉ和第二 ΤΉ其中之一, 目标 ΤΉ为第一 ΤΉ和第二 ΤΉ的另一个; 发送器 504 , 用于以目标 ΤΉ发送数据给基站。  The receiver 503 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, and receive the handover indication information sent by the base station, where the processor 501 is configured to: according to the handover indication information, Switching to a target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first ΤΉ and the second ,, the target ΤΉ is the other of the first ΤΉ and the second ;; the transmitter 504 is configured to target ΤΉ Send data to the base station.
其中, 在图 7中, 总线架构 (用总线 500来代表), 总线 500可以包括任 意数量的互联的总线和桥, 总线 500将包括由处理器 501代表的一个或多个 处理器和存储器 502代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。 总线 500还可以 将诸如外围设备、 稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电路链接在一起, 这些都是本领域所公知的, 因此, 本文不再对其进行进一步描述。 总线接口 505在总线 500和接收器 503、 发送器 504之间提供接口。 接收器 503和发送 器 504可以是同一个元件, 即收发机, 提供用于在传输介质上与各种其他装 置通信的单元。 取决于用户设备的性质, 还可以提供用户接口 506, 例如小键 盘、 显示器、 扬声器、 麦克风、 操纵杆。  Wherein, in FIG. 7, a bus architecture (represented by bus 500), bus 500 can include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, and bus 500 will include one or more processors and memory 502 represented by processor 501. The various circuits of the memory are linked together. The bus 500 can also link various other circuits such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and, therefore, will not be further described herein. Bus interface 505 provides an interface between bus 500 and receiver 503, transmitter 504. Receiver 503 and transmitter 504 may be the same component, i.e., a transceiver, providing means for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium. Depending on the nature of the user device, a user interface 506 can also be provided, such as a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick.
处理器 501 负责管理总线 500和通常的处理, 而存储器 502可以被用于 存储处理器 501在执行操作时所使用的数据。  The processor 501 is responsible for managing the bus 500 and the usual processing, and the memory 502 can be used to store data used by the processor 501 when performing operations.
较佳的, 第一 TTI具体为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI具体为 10msTTI。  Preferably, the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
较佳的, 发送器 504还用于发送确认信息给基站。 在一实施例中, 发送器 504具体用于反馈 ACK信息或 NACK信息给基 站。 Preferably, the transmitter 504 is further configured to send an acknowledgement message to the base station. In an embodiment, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to feed back ACK information or NACK information to the base station.
在另一实施例中, 发送器 504具体用于在 E-DPCCH 中携带禁止使用的 E-TFCI来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是 预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或用于发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合 并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示用户设备已收到切换指示 信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  In another embodiment, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to: in the E-DPCCH, carry the forbidden E-TFCI to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or Configured or reserved; or used to transmit a separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
在另一实施例中, 发送器 504具体用于: 当当前 TTI为 2ms TTI, 并且用 户设备发送给基站的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一增强 专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息,第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者,  In another embodiment, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to: when the current TTI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, the sending carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) indicating (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
当当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量( UPH ) 值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信 息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current time is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E -DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
在再一实施例中, 发送器 504具体用于以目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送 控制信息或数据, 以指示已接收到切换指示信息。  In still another embodiment, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to send control information or data with an uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target 以 to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
在进一步的实施例中,发送器 504具体用于使用 DPCCH中的域信息来指 示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息。  In a further embodiment, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to use the domain information in the DPCCH to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
从另一角度, 不管确认信息的形式是怎样的, 发送器 504具体用于在接 收到切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给基站, 其中, 最大时间为 预定义的或可配置的。  From another point of view, regardless of the form of the acknowledgment information, the transmitter 504 is specifically configured to send the acknowledgment information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover indication information, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
较佳的, 发送器 504还用于:  Preferably, the transmitter 504 is further configured to:
当以第一 ΤΉ发送数据给基站时, 在发送完确认信息后的下 M个子帧后 用第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于 等于零的整数; 当以第二 ΤΉ发送数据给基站时,在发送完确认信息后的下 Ν个 CF 后 用第二 ΤΤΙ发送数据给基站, 其中 Ν为预定义的或可配置的, Ν为大于等于 零的整数。 When the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame, the data is sent to the base station by using the first frame after the M subframes after the acknowledgement information is sent, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is greater than or equal to zero. Integer When the data is sent to the base station by the second frame, the data is sent to the base station by using the second frame after the next CF is sent, where Ν is predefined or configurable, and Ν is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
较佳的,处理器 501还用于清除 HARQ緩冲区中的数据;并重置 MAC-i/is 实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  Preferably, the processor 501 is further configured to clear data in the HARQ buffer; and reset the MAC-i/is entity to set the TSN to zero.
较佳的, 处理器 501还用于将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为目标 ΤΉ对 应的 MAC-i PDU; 重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将 TSN置为 0。  Preferably, the processor 501 is further configured to construct the data in the HARQ buffer as the target MAC-i PDU; reset the MAC-i/is entity, and set the TSN to 0.
较佳的, 处理器 501还用于删除未发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一 MAC-i PDU;构建目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU,其中,在第二 MAC-i PDU 中和在第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相同; 发送器 504用于发送所述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。  Preferably, the processor 501 is further configured to delete the first MAC-i PDU corresponding to the 前 before the successful handover, and construct the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, where the second MAC-i PDU is in the second MAC-i PDU. And in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; the transmitter 504 is configured to send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI.
较佳的, 用户设备还包括编码器, 耦合至处理器 501 , 用于在物理层将未 发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一数据编码为目标 ΤΉ对应的第二数据; 发送器 504用于发送第二数据。  Preferably, the user equipment further includes an encoder, coupled to the processor 501, for encoding, in the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the target before the unsuccessful handover is the second data corresponding to the target ;; Send the second data.
较佳的, 发送器 504还用于发送支持 TTI切换的能力指示信息。  Preferably, the transmitter 504 is further configured to send capability indication information that supports TTI handover.
较佳的, 接收器 503还用于接收基站发送的 HS-SCCH order。  Preferably, the receiver 503 is further configured to receive the HS-SCCH order sent by the base station.
在以上各实施例中, 第一配置信息包括第一 TTI 对应的第一 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数,第二配置信息包括第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow 参数。  In the foregoing embodiments, the first configuration information includes a first E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the first TTI, and the second configuration information includes a second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second ΤΉ.
进一步, 第一配置信息还包括第一 TTI对应的第一 DTX参数和 /或第一 DRX参数,第二配置信息还包括第二 TTI对应的第二 DTX参数和 /或第二 DRX 参数。  Further, the first configuration information further includes a first DTX parameter and/or a first DRX parameter corresponding to the first TTI, and the second configuration information further includes a second DTX parameter and/or a second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TTI.
在以上各实施例中, 在不冲突的情况下, 可以相互组合实施。  In the above embodiments, they may be implemented in combination with each other without conflict.
前述图 2实施例中的 ΤΉ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的用户设备, 通过前述对 TTI切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技 术人员可以清楚的知道本实施例中用户设备的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的 筒洁, 在此不再详述。 实施例五 The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing method for switching the ΤΉ in the embodiment of FIG. 2 are also applicable to the user equipment in this embodiment. Through the foregoing detailed description of the TTI switching method, those skilled in the art can clearly understand the embodiment. The implementation method of the user equipment, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here. Embodiment 5
在本实施例中, 提供了一种基站, 如图 8所示, 该基站包括:  In this embodiment, a base station is provided. As shown in FIG. 8, the base station includes:
第一接收单元 601 , 用于接收第一 TTI对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI 对应的第二配置信息; 第一发送单元 602,用于向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切 换指示信息。  The first receiving unit 601 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first TTI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI. The first sending unit 602 is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
较佳的, 第一 TTI具体为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI具体为 10msTTI。  Preferably, the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于接收用户设备发送的确认信 息。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
较佳的, 第一发送单元 602具体还用于如果在最大时间内, 基站未接收 到确认信息, 则重新发送切换指示信息, 其中, 最大时间为预定义的或可配 置的。  Preferably, the first sending unit 602 is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within the maximum time, retransmit the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于接收用户设备在增强专用物 理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示(E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合 并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); 处理单元, 用于基于 E-TFCI确 认用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或 可配置的或预留的; 或, 用于基于非零 TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切换指示 信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) that is prohibited by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or a physical control channel (DPCCH) for receiving a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment, and a processing unit, configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where The used E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, for confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable .
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于当当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且 基站接收到的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携带 第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )或, 用于当当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms TTI, 并且基站接收到的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH );  Preferably, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to: when the current frame is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated transmission sent by the user equipment An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the channel format combining indication (E-TFCI) or for when the current ΤΉ type is 10 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than a second threshold, receiving An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carried by the user equipment carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI);
处理单元, 用于基于第一 E-TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于第二 E-TFCI确认用户设 备已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 较佳的, 基站还包括: 第二发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送a processing unit, configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, for confirming, by the second E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received To the handover indication information, the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable. Preferably, the base station further includes: a second sending unit, configured to send to the radio network controller
MAC-i/is Reset指示或 MAC-is Reset指示。 MAC-i/is Reset indication or MAC-is Reset indication.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第三发送单元, 用于发送用户设备的切换后的目 标 TTI给无线网络控制器。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a third sending unit, configured to send the switched target TTI of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
较佳的,基站具有关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 第一发送单元 602具体用于在在基站处于开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 向用 户设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示信息。  Preferably, the base station has an operation mode of turning off the handover and an operation mode of the on/off handover, and the first sending unit 602 is specifically configured to send the handover indication information of the TTI handover to the user equipment in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover mode. .
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第三接收单元, 用于在基站处于关闭 ΤΉ切换的 工作模式下, 接收无线网络控制器发送的指示信息, 并将指示信息发送给切 换单元; 切换单元, 用于基于指示信息将基站由关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式切 换为开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a third receiving unit, configured to: receive the indication information sent by the radio network controller, and send the indication information to the switching unit, in the working mode in which the base station is in the closed/switching mode; The working mode in which the base station is switched from being turned off is switched to the operating mode in which the switching is started based on the indication information.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第四发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a fourth sending unit, configured to send capability indication information supporting the handover to the radio network controller.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第五发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制发送指示信 息, 以使无线网络控制器发送指示信息给非服务基站, 以使非服务基站切换 至切换后的目标 TTI。 在本实施例中, 可以适用于软切换区域。  Preferably, the base station further includes: a fifth sending unit, configured to send the indication information to the wireless network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after the handover. In this embodiment, it can be applied to a soft switching area.
进一步, 指示信息中包含切换至目标 ΤΤΙ的时间信息。  Further, the indication information includes time information for switching to the target ΤΤΙ.
在以上实施例中, 第一接收单元 601至第三接收单元具体可以是同一个, 也可以是两两不同的接收单元; 而第一发送单元 602至第五发送单元可以是 相同的发送单元, 也可以是两两互不相同的发送单元。  In the above embodiment, the first receiving unit 601 to the third receiving unit may be the same one, or may be two different receiving units; and the first sending unit 602 to the fifth sending unit may be the same sending unit. It can also be a sending unit that is different from each other.
在以上各实施例中, 在不冲突的情况下, 可以相互组合实施。  In the above embodiments, they may be implemented in combination with each other without conflict.
前述图 4实施例中的 ΤΉ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的基站, 通过前述对 ΤΉ切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技术人 员可以清楚的知道本实施例中基站的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的筒洁, 在 此不再详述。  The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing ΤΉ handover method in the embodiment of FIG. 4 are also applicable to the base station in this embodiment. The detailed description of the foregoing handover method can be clearly known to those skilled in the art. The implementation method of the base station, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
实施例六  Embodiment 6
在本实施例中, 提供一种基站, 请参考图 9, 为基站的硬件实现示例的框 图, 该基站包括: In this embodiment, a base station is provided. Please refer to FIG. 9, which is a block diagram of a hardware implementation example of a base station. The base station includes:
接收器 701 ,用于接收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第 二配置信息; 发送器 702, 用于向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。  The receiver 701 is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI. The transmitter 702 is configured to send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment.
在图 9中, 在下行链路通信中, 发射处理器 705可以从数据源接收数据 并且从处理器 704接收控制信息。 发射处理器 705为该数据、 控制信息以及 参考信号提供各种信号处理功能, 例如发射处理器 705可以进行编码。 发射 处理器 705将生成的符号提供给发射帧处理器 430 以创建帧结构, 从而得到 一系列帧。 然后将这些帧提供给发送器 702, 其提供各种信号调节功能, 包括 放大、 滤波以及将帧调制到载波上, 以便通过天线 703在无线介质上进行传 输。  In FIG. 9, in downlink communications, transmit processor 705 can receive data from a data source and receive control information from processor 704. Transmit processor 705 provides various signal processing functions for the data, control information, and reference signals, for example, transmit processor 705 can encode. Transmit processor 705 provides the generated symbols to transmit frame processor 430 to create a frame structure resulting in a series of frames. These frames are then provided to a transmitter 702 which provides various signal conditioning functions including amplification, filtering, and modulating the frame onto a carrier for transmission over the wireless medium via antenna 703.
而接收器 701通过天线 703接收数据并对数据进行处理已恢复调制到载 波上的信息, 将接收器 701恢复的信息提供给接收帧处理器 709, 其对每个帧 进行解析, 接收处理器 710对帧进行解码, 并将成功解码的控制信号提供给 处理器 704, 如果一些帧未能由接收处理器 710成功进行解码, 则处理器 704 还可以使用 ACK和 /或 NACK协议来支持对那些帧的重传请求。  The receiver 701 receives the data through the antenna 703 and processes the data to restore the information modulated onto the carrier, and the information recovered by the receiver 701 is supplied to the receiving frame processor 709, which parses each frame, and the receiving processor 710 The frame is decoded and the successfully decoded control signal is provided to the processor 704. If some frames are not successfully decoded by the receive processor 710, the processor 704 can also support those frames using the ACK and/or NACK protocols. Retransmission request.
处理器 704可以提供各种功能, 包括定时, 外围接口, 电压调节、 电源 管理以及其他控制功能。 存储器 707可以用于存储基站的数据和软件。  The processor 704 can provide various functions including timing, peripheral interfaces, voltage regulation, power management, and other control functions. Memory 707 can be used to store data and software for the base station.
较佳的, 第一 TTI具体为 2msTTI, 第二 TTI具体为 10msTTI。  Preferably, the first TTI is specifically 2 ms TTI, and the second TTI is specifically 10 ms TTI.
较佳的, 接收器 701还用于: 接收用户设备发送的确认信息。  Preferably, the receiver 701 is further configured to: receive the acknowledgement information sent by the user equipment.
较佳的, 发送器 702还用于: 如果在最大时间内, 基站未接收到确认信 息, 则重新发送切换指示信息, 其中, 最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。  Preferably, the transmitter 702 is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the acknowledgement information within the maximum time, retransmit the handover indication information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
较佳的, 基站还包括: 第一处理器, 接收器 701还用于: 用于接收用户 设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收用户设备发送的单独的携带非 零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); 第一处理器 用于基于 E-TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 用于基于非零 TFCI确认用户 设备已接收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 较佳的, 基站还包括: 第一处理器, 接收器 701还用于: 用于当当前 TTI 为 2ms TTI, 并且基站接收到的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收用户 设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用 物理控制信道(E-DPCCH )或, 用于当当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且基站 接收到的功率余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携带第二 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 第一处理器用于: 基于第一 E-TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切 换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于第二 E-TFCI 确认用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 Preferably, the base station further includes: a first processor, where the receiver 701 is further configured to: receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication that is prohibited by the user equipment from being carried in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) ( E-TFCI); or, for receiving a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment; the first processor is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received based on the E-TFCI Handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, for confirming the user based on the non-zero TFCI The device has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable. Preferably, the base station further includes: a first processor, where the receiver 701 is further configured to: when the current TTI is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, and the receiving user equipment sends An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combining indication (E-TFCI) or for the current ΤΉ type of 10 ms 并且, and the power headroom received by the base station (UPH) And the value is greater than the second threshold, and receives an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that is sent by the user equipment and carries a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); the first processor is configured to: be based on the first E-TFCI Confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, for confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI is Predefined or configurable.
较佳的,发送器 702还用于: 向无线网络控制器发送 MAC-i/is Reset指示 或 MAC-is Reset指示。  Preferably, the transmitter 702 is further configured to: send a MAC-i/is Reset indication or a MAC-is Reset indication to the radio network controller.
较佳的, 发送器 702还用于: 发送用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线 网络控制器。  Preferably, the transmitter 702 is further configured to: send the switched target of the user equipment to the wireless network controller.
较佳的,基站具有关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 发送器 702具体用于: 在基站处于开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 向用户设备 发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。  Preferably, the base station has an operation mode of turning off the handover and an operation mode of enabling the handover, and the transmitter 702 is specifically configured to: send the handover indication information of the handover to the user equipment in the working mode in which the base station is in the on/off handover.
进一步, 接收器 701用于在基站处于关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 接收 无线网络控制器发送的指示信息; 基站还包括处理器 704, 用于: 将基站由关 闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式切换为开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。  Further, the receiver 701 is configured to receive the indication information sent by the radio network controller in the working mode in which the base station is in the off-hook mode; the base station further includes a processor 704, configured to: switch the working mode of the base station from the closed port to the on mode. ΤΉ Switching mode of operation.
较佳的, 发送器 702用于向无线网络控制器发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指 示信息。  Preferably, the transmitter 702 is configured to send the capability indication information supporting the handover to the radio network controller.
较佳的, 发送器 702用于向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使无线网络 控制器发送指示信息给非服务基站, 以使非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTL  Preferably, the transmitter 702 is configured to send indication information to the wireless network control, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTL after the handover.
进一步, 指示信息中包含切换至目标 TTI的时间信息。  Further, the indication information includes time information for switching to the target TTI.
在以上各实施例中, 在不冲突的情况下, 可以相互组合实施。 前述图 4实施例中的 ΤΉ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的基站, 通过前述对 ΤΉ切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技术人 员可以清楚的知道本实施例中基站的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的筒洁, 在 此不再详述。 In the above embodiments, they may be implemented in combination with each other without conflict. The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing ΤΉ handover method in the embodiment of FIG. 4 are also applicable to the base station in this embodiment. The detailed description of the foregoing handover method can be clearly known to those skilled in the art. The implementation method of the base station, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
本发明实施例中, 在用户设备端预配有第一 ΤΉ和第一 TTI不同的第二 TTI, 以及第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ对应的第二配置信息, 只 要在接收到基站发送的切换指示信息之后,就可以直接对用户设备的当前 TTI 进行切换, 并切换至与切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI,并以目标 ΤΉ发送数据 给基站, 所以不需要在切换的过程中, RNC再向基站发送新的配置信息, 所 以也就不需要 RNC和基站之间进行多次信令交互,所以本实施例中的 ΤΉ切 换过程及时, 时延较小, 所以避免了在 2msTTI向 lOmsTTI切换时, E-DCH 数据丟失或掉话, 同时因为能够及时执行 lOmsTTI向 2msTTI的切换, 所以 能够提高峰值速率。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the user device is pre-configured with a second TTI different from the first TTI, and the first configuration information corresponding to the first UI and the second configuration information corresponding to the second UI, as long as receiving After the handover indication information sent by the base station, the current TTI of the user equipment can be directly switched, and the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information is switched, and the data is sent to the base station by the target ,, so there is no need to be in the process of handover. The RNC sends the new configuration information to the base station again, so that the signaling interaction between the RNC and the base station is not required. Therefore, the handover process in this embodiment is timely and the delay is small, so the 2ms TTI is avoided. When the OmsTTI is switched, the E-DCH data is lost or dropped, and the peak rate can be increased because the lOmsTTI can be switched to the 2ms TTI in time.
在本发明的另一方面, 可以是由基站控制器(RNC )触发 TTI切换, 进 行异步重配,该方法的优点在于可以快速执行 TTI切换,以下将详细介绍 RNC 触发 ΤΉ切换的过程。  In another aspect of the present invention, the TTI handover may be triggered by the base station controller (RNC) for asynchronous reconfiguration. The advantage of this method is that the TTI handover can be performed quickly. The RNC triggering handover procedure will be described in detail below.
如图 10所示, 为 RNC、 基站和 UE之间的 ΤΉ切换的方法流程图。 该方 法包括:  As shown in FIG. 10, it is a flowchart of a method for switching between an RNC, a base station, and a UE. The method includes:
步骤 801 : RNC向 UE和基站发送 TTI切换指示信息;  Step 801: The RNC sends TTI handover indication information to the UE and the base station.
步骤 802: UE接收 RNC发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息;  Step 802: The UE receives the handover indication information sent by the RNC.
步骤 803: 基站接收 RNC发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息;  Step 803: The base station receives the handover indication information sent by the RNC.
步骤 804: UE发送携带用于 ΤΉ切换指示确认的传输格式组合的控制信 道给基站;  Step 804: The UE sends a control channel carrying a transport format combination for the handover indication acknowledgement to the base station;
步骤 805:基站接收 UE发送的携带用于 ΤΉ切换指示确认的传输格式组 合的控制信道;  Step 805: The base station receives a control channel that is sent by the UE and carries a combination of transmission formats for the handover indication acknowledgement.
步骤 806: UE在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与切换指示信息对应的 目标 TTI; 步骤 807:基站在预定义或预配置的时间点以目标 ΤΉ译码 UE发送的上 行数据; Step 806: The UE switches to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point; Step 807: The base station decodes the uplink data sent by the UE by using the target at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
步骤 808: UE以目标 ΤΉ发送切换完成消息给 RNC。  Step 808: The UE sends a handover complete message to the RNC with the target ΤΉ.
实施例七,即以用户设备侧为例, ΤΉ切换方法包括:步骤 802、步骤 804, 进一步还可以包括步骤 806; 再进一步, 还可以包括步骤 808。  In the seventh embodiment, the user equipment side is taken as an example, the method for the handover includes: step 802, step 804, and further, step 806; further, step 808 may be further included.
实施例八, 即以基站侧为例, ΤΉ切换方法包括: 步骤 803、 步骤 805 , 进一步还可以包括步骤 807。  The eighth embodiment, that is, taking the base station side as an example, the handover method includes: Step 803, step 805, and further, step 807 is further included.
以下将详细描述本实施例中的 ΤΉ切换方法的实施过程。  The implementation of the ΤΉ switching method in this embodiment will be described in detail below.
首先, 步骤 801 , RNC向 UE和基站发送 ΤΉ切换指示信息, 在实际运 用中, RNC向 UE发送的 ΤΉ切换指示信息可以为无线承载建立消息( RADIO BEARER SETUP ) 或无线 载 载重配消 息 ( RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION ) 或传输信道重配消息 ( TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION ), RNC向基站发送的 TTI切换指示消息可以为无线链 路重配消息 ( RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST )。  First, in step 801, the RNC sends the handover indication information to the UE and the base station. In actual operation, the handover indication information sent by the RNC to the UE may be a radio bearer setup message (RADIO BEARER SETUP) or a radio bearer reconfiguration message (RADIO BEARER) RECONFIGURATION or Transport CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION, the TTI handover indication message sent by the RNC to the base station may be a radio link reconfiguration message (RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION REQUEST).
进一步, 该 ΤΉ切换指示消息, 用于指示 UE从 E-DCH 2ms TTI切换到 E-DCH 10ms TTI, 或者用于指示 UE从 E-DCH 10ms TTI切换到 E-DCH 2ms TTI, 或者用于指示 UE从 E-DCH 10ms TTI切换到 R99 DCH信道。  Further, the handover indication message is used to indicate that the UE switches from the E-DCH 2ms TTI to the E-DCH 10ms TTI, or is used to indicate that the UE switches from the E-DCH 10ms TTI to the E-DCH 2ms TTI, or is used to indicate the UE. Switch from the E-DCH 10ms TTI to the R99 DCH channel.
可选的, 该 TTI切换指示信息中包含第一增益因子和第二增益因子, 第 一增益因子用于确定用户设备发送不包含 ΤΤΙ切换指示确认信息时控制信道 的功率, 例如用于确定伴随发送数据信道(DPDCH或 E-DPDCH ) 时控制信 道(DPCCH或 E-DPCCH ) 的功率; 第二增益因子用于确定用户设备发送包 含 ΤΤΙ切换指示确认信息的控制信道( DPCCH或 E-DPCCH )的功率。该 ΤΤΙ 切换指示信息中包含至少两个增益因子的优点在于, 当用户设备收到 ΤΤΙ切 换指示信息后, 以更大的功率发送携带 ΤΤΙ切换指示确认信息的传输格式组 合的控制信道, 以便基站正确译码该控制信道,确定用户设备切换到目标 ΤΤΙ 的时机。  Optionally, the TTI handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, where the first gain factor is used to determine a power of the control channel when the user equipment sends the handover indication confirmation information that is not included, for example, to determine the accompanying transmission. The power of the control channel (DPCCH or E-DPCCH) when the data channel (DPDCH or E-DPDCH) is used; the second gain factor is used to determine the power of the control channel (DPCCH or E-DPCCH) that the user equipment transmits the handover indication acknowledgement information . The advantage that the at least two gain factors are included in the handover indication information is that, after the user equipment receives the handover indication information, the control channel carrying the transmission format combination of the handover indication acknowledgement information is transmitted with greater power, so that the base station is correct. The control channel is decoded to determine when the user equipment switches to the target ΤΤΙ.
对应于 UE侧,就执行步骤 802, 即接收无线网络控制器 RNC发送的 ΤΤΙ 切换指示信息。 Corresponding to the UE side, step 802 is performed, that is, the radio network controller RNC is sent. Switch the indication information.
对应于基站侧,就执行步骤 803 ,即接收无线网络控制器 RNC发送的 TTI 切换指示信息。 其中, 步骤 802和步骤 803在实际运用中, 有可能是同时执 行的, 也有可能不同时执行, 取决于通信网络的通信状况。  Corresponding to the base station side, step 803 is performed, that is, the TTI handover indication information sent by the radio network controller RNC is received. In the actual operation, the steps 802 and 803 may be performed at the same time, or may be performed at different times, depending on the communication status of the communication network.
接下来, UE就执行步骤 804, 即发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基 站, 使得基站能够基于传输格式组合确定用户设备已收到切换指示信息。  Next, the UE performs step 804 to transmit a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transport format combination.
在实际运用中, 步骤 804具有多种实施方式, 具体举例说明如下: 在第一实施方式中, 步骤 804 具体为在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的 或可配置的或预留的。例如可以通过 RNC进行配置,比如使用 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS ( Transport Block Size, 传输块大小 )表中的禁止使用的 E-TFCL 再比如 该 E-TFCI是预留的, 不能用于正常的数据传输, 只用于指示用户正确收到切 换指示信息。 或  In an actual application, the step 804 has multiple implementation manners, which are specifically illustrated as follows: In the first implementation manner, step 804 is specifically for carrying an enhanced dedicated transport channel format that is prohibited from being used in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). The merge indication (E-TFCI) indicates that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. For example, it can be configured through the RNC, for example, using the E-TFCL in the 2ms TTI E-DCH TBS (Transport Block Size) table. For example, the E-TFCI is reserved and cannot be used for normal data. The transmission is only used to instruct the user to correctly receive the handover indication information. Or
用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控 制信道(DPCCH ) 来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI 是预定义的, 或可配置的。  The user equipment sends a separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
比如当用户设备所有的业务承载在 E-DCH, 并且用户设备当前所用的 TTI类型为 E-DCH 10ms , 这时因为没有 R99业务, 所以 DPCCH中 TFCI为 0; 当 UE收到切换指示信息后( E-DCH 10ms TTI切换为 DCH 10ms TTI的切 换指示信息),则发送单独的携带非零 TFCI的 DPCCH来指示 UE收到切换指 示信息; 相应的基站检测到该 DPCCH中的 TFCI为非零值, 则认为 UE正确 收到切换指示信息, 该非零 TFCI是预定义或可配置的。 需要说明的是, 这里 所说的单独发送指 DPCCH信道单独发送, 并没有伴随的专用物理数据信道 ( DPDCH ) 的信道发送。  For example, when all the services of the user equipment are carried in the E-DCH, and the TTI type currently used by the user equipment is E-DCH 10 ms, the TFCI in the DPCCH is 0 because there is no R99 service; when the UE receives the handover indication information ( The E-DCH 10ms TTI is switched to the DCH 10ms TTI handover indication information), and the separate DPCCH carrying the non-zero TFCI is sent to instruct the UE to receive the handover indication information; the corresponding base station detects that the TFCI in the DPCCH is a non-zero value, Then, it is considered that the UE correctly receives the handover indication information, and the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable. It should be noted that the separate transmission referred to herein means that the DPCCH channel is separately transmitted, and there is no accompanying dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) channel transmission.
再例如, 当用户设备接收到 ΤΉ切换指示信息, 且该切换指示信息指示 UE从 E-DCH 2ms切换 E-DCH 10ms TTI时,用户设备只发送 E-DPCCH不发 送 E-DPDCH。 可选的, 此时 E-DPCCH中包含的 E-TFCI不用于正常数据传 输, 该 E-TFCI可以是预定义的,或可配置的; 可选的, 为了保证该 E-DPCCH 被基站检测到, 用户设备可以允许的最大功率发送 E-DPCCH, 或者以上述第 二增益因子确定该 E-DPCCH 的发射功率。 该方法也可以应用于 E-DCH到 R99 DCH的切换。 For another example, when the user equipment receives the handover indication information, and the handover indication information indicates that the UE switches the E-DCH 10ms TTI from the E-DCH 2ms, the user equipment only sends the E-DPCCH. Send E-DPDCH. Optionally, the E-TFCI included in the E-DPCCH is not used for normal data transmission, and the E-TFCI may be predefined or configurable; optionally, to ensure that the E-DPCCH is detected by the base station. The user equipment may transmit the E-DPCCH with the maximum power allowed, or determine the transmit power of the E-DPCCH with the second gain factor described above. This method can also be applied to the switching of E-DCH to R99 DCH.
再例如, 当用户设备收到 ΤΉ切换指示信息,且该切换指示信息指示 UE 从 E-DCH 10ms切换到 R99 DCH时,用户设备只发送 DPCCH不发送 DPDCH。 在切换前, DPCCH信道中携带的 TFCI为一个预定义的值, 比如为 0; 用户 设备收到切换指示信息后, 发送单独的 DPCCH, 且该单独的 DPCCH中携带 一个非零值; 基站检测到携带非零值的 TFCI的 DPCCH信道, 则可以确定用 户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 进而可以确定用户设备切换到 R99 DCH的时 机。 该方法也可以应用于 E-DCH 2msTTI与 E-DCH 10ms TTI的切换。  For another example, when the user equipment receives the handover indication information, and the handover indication information indicates that the UE switches from the E-DCH 10ms to the R99 DCH, the user equipment only sends the DPCCH and does not send the DPDCH. Before the handover, the TFCI carried in the DPCCH channel is a predefined value, for example, 0; after receiving the handover indication information, the user equipment sends a separate DPCCH, and the single DPCCH carries a non-zero value; If the DPCCH channel of the non-zero value TFCI is carried, it can be determined that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and then the timing of the user equipment switching to the R99 DCH can be determined. This method can also be applied to the switching of E-DCH 2msTTI and E-DCH 10ms TTI.
可选的, 为了保证该 DPCCH被基站检测到, 用户设备以允许的最大功 率发送 DPCCH, 或者以上述第二增益因子确定该 DPCCH的功率。  Optionally, in order to ensure that the DPCCH is detected by the base station, the user equipment sends the DPCCH at the maximum allowed power, or determines the power of the DPCCH by using the second gain factor.
在第二实施方式中,步骤 804具体为:当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则用户设备发送 携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信 道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预 定义的或可配置的; 或者,  In the second implementation, step 804 is specifically: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, the user equipment sends the first enhanced dedicated transport channel. An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) of the format merge indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI being predefined or configurable; or
当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送给基站的 UPH 值大于第二阈值, 则用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到 切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the user equipment sends an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) ( E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
具体来说, 当 UPH小于第一阈值, 则说明用户处于功率受限或覆盖受限 状态,这时不可能使用较高的速率传输 E-DCH数据,即一般认为这时 E-TFCI 值较小; 所以当 UE收到 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms TTI的切换指示信息后,发 送携带第一 E-TFCI (该第一 E-TFCI值较大 )的 E-DPCCH , 就可以指示基站 该 UE正确收到切换指示信息。相应的, 基站发送完 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms TTI 的切换指示信息后, 检测到携带较大值的 E-TFCI (即第一 E-TFCI ) 的 E-DPCCH信道,则认为 UE收到 E-DCH 2ms切换为 10ms 的 TTI切换指示信 息。 这里的第一 E-TFCI可以用于 E-DCH数据传输, 只是在 UPH小于第一阈 值时, UE不选择该第一 E-TFCI用于 E-DCH数据传输, 所以 UE可以用该第 一 E-TFCI来指示收到基站发送的切换指示信息。 Specifically, when the UPH is smaller than the first threshold, the user is in a power limited or coverage limited state, and it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a higher rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be small at this time. Therefore, when the UE receives the handover indication information that the E-DCH 2ms is switched to the 10ms TTI, the UE transmits the E-DPCCH carrying the first E-TFCI (the first E-TFCI value is large), and the base station can be indicated. The UE correctly receives the handover indication information. Correspondingly, after the base station sends the E-DCH 2ms switch to the 10ms TTI handover indication information, and detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the larger E-TFCI (ie, the first E-TFCI), the UE considers that the UE receives the E. -DCH 2ms is switched to 10ms of TTI handover indication information. The first E-TFCI can be used for E-DCH data transmission, but when the UPH is less than the first threshold, the UE does not select the first E-TFCI for E-DCH data transmission, so the UE can use the first E. - TFCI to indicate the handover indication information sent by the base station.
当 UPH大于第二阈值, 则说明用户处于小区近点或中点位置, 这时不可 能使用较小的速率传输 E-DCH数据, 即一般认为这时 E-TFCI值较大; 当 UE 收到 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms的 ΤΉ切换指示信息后,发送携带第二 E-TFCI (该第二 E-TFCI值较小, 小于第一 E-TFCI; 或者是 E-DCH传输块大小表格 E-DCH Transport Block Size Table中的最小值) 的 E-DPCCH。 相应的, 基站 发送完 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms 的 ΤΉ切换指示信息后, 检测到携带较小值 的 E-TFCI的 E-DPCCH信道, 则认为 UE收到 E-DCH 10ms切换为 2ms 的 ΤΉ切换消息。  When the UPH is greater than the second threshold, it indicates that the user is in the near-point or mid-point of the cell. At this time, it is impossible to transmit the E-DCH data at a smaller rate, that is, the E-TFCI value is generally considered to be larger at this time; when the UE receives After the E-DCH 10ms is switched to the 2ms handover indication information, the transmission carries the second E-TFCI (the second E-TFCI value is smaller, smaller than the first E-TFCI; or the E-DCH transport block size table E- E-DPCCH of the minimum value in the DCH Transport Block Size Table). Correspondingly, after the E-DCH 10ms switch to the 2ms handover indication information, the base station detects the E-DPCCH channel carrying the E-TFCI with a smaller value, and considers that the UE receives the E-DCH 10ms switch to 2ms. Switch messages.
对应于基站侧的步骤即为步骤 805 ,接收 UE发送的携带传输格式组合的 控制信道, 以此来确定用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 因为双方已有约定在 接收到切换指示信息的某个无线帧切换到目标 ΤΉ,例如预定义或预配置的时 间点就切换, 所以基站就可以确定用户设备使用目标 ΤΉ的时机, 然后就可 以知道何时以与切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI来译码用户设备发送的上行数 据, 所以基站不需要向现有技术中那样在收到 RNC的重配信令后, 按照切换 前后两种 TTI类型尝试解析而导致浪费基站的硬件资源, 因此, 本发明实施 例中的方法能够节约基站的硬件资源。  Steps corresponding to the base station side are step 805, and receiving a control channel that carries the transport format combination sent by the UE, so as to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, because the two parties have agreed to receive the handover indication information. The radio frame is switched to the target ΤΉ, for example, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, so the base station can determine the timing of the user equipment using the target ,, and then can know when to decode with the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information. The uplink data sent by the user equipment, so the base station does not need to perform the analysis of the two types of TTIs before and after the handover, and the hardware resources of the base station are wasted after the re-allocation signaling of the RNC is received in the prior art. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention wastes the hardware resources of the base station. The method in the middle can save the hardware resources of the base station.
接下来, UE执行步骤 806, 即在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与切换 指示信息对应的目标 ΤΉ, 以 E-DCH 2ms 到 E-DCH 10 ms TTI切换为例, 用 户设备发送完包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的 E-DPCCH或 DPCCH后,在下一 个或几个无线帧切换到 10ms TTI。  Next, the UE performs step 806, that is, switching to the target 对应 corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point, taking the E-DCH 2ms to E-DCH 10 ms TTI handover as an example, the user equipment sends the included ΤΉ After switching the E-DPCCH or DPCCH indicating the acknowledgment information, switch to the 10ms TTI in the next or several radio frames.
再以 E-DCH 10ms 到 E-DCH 2 ms TTI切换为例, 用户设备发送完包含 TTI切换指示确认信息的 E-DPCCH或 DPCCH后, 在下 Ν 个子帧切换到Taking the E-DCH 10ms to E-DCH 2 ms TTI switch as an example, the user equipment sends the included After the TTI switches the E-DPCCH or DPCCH indicating the confirmation information, the next subframe is switched to
E-DCH 2ms TTI; N是预定义的, 或可配置的。 E-DCH 2ms TTI; N is predefined, or configurable.
然后 UE执行步骤 808, 即用户设备以目标 ΤΉ发送切换完成消息。 其中, 该切换完成消息为无线承载建立完成消息 ( RADIO BEARER The UE then proceeds to step 808 where the user equipment transmits a handover complete message with the target. The handover complete message is a radio bearer setup complete message (RADIO BEARER)
SETUP COMPLETE ) 或无线 载 载重配完成消息 ( RADIO BEARERSETUP COMPLETE) or wireless load reconfiguration complete message (RADIO BEARER
RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE )或传输信道重配完成消息(TRANSPORTRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE) or transport channel reconfiguration complete message (TRANSPORT
CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE )„ CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE )„
而对于基站侧, 在步骤 805之后, 就执行步骤 807, 即在预定义或预配置 的时间点开始以目标 TTI译码 UE发送的上行数据, 而该目标 ΤΉ与切换指 示信息对应。  For the base station side, after step 805, step 807 is performed, that is, the uplink data sent by the UE is decoded by the target TTI at a predefined or pre-configured time point, and the target 对应 corresponds to the handover indication information.
具体来说, 例如当基站检测到 E-DPCCH, 并且该 E-DPCCH 中携带的 E-TFCI不用于正常数据传输时, 则认为 UE已经收到 TTI切换指示信息; 则 基站在下 M个无线帧或下 N个子帧按照目标 ΤΉ译码 UE发送的上行数据; 或者,  Specifically, for example, when the base station detects the E-DPCCH, and the E-TFCI carried in the E-DPCCH is not used for normal data transmission, it is considered that the UE has received the TTI handover indication information; then the base station is in the next M radio frames or The next N subframes decode the uplink data sent by the UE according to the target ;; or
当基站检测到携带有非零值的 DPCCH后,认为 UE已经收到 ΤΉ切换指 示信息; 则基站在下 M个无线帧或下 N个子帧按照目标 ΤΉ译码 UE发送的 上行数据。  After the base station detects that the DPCCH carrying the non-zero value, the UE considers that the UE has received the handover indication information; the base station decodes the uplink data sent by the UE according to the target in the next M radio frames or the next N subframes.
实施例九  Example nine
基于同一设计思路, 本发明实施例还提供一种用户设备, 如图 11所示, 该用户设备包括: 接收单元 901 , 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间 隔 (ΤΉ )切换指示信息; 发送单元 902, 用于发送携带传输格式组合的控制 信道给基站, 使得基站能够基于传输格式组合确定用户设备已收到切换指示 信息。  Based on the same design, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a user equipment. As shown in FIG. 11, the user equipment includes: a receiving unit 901, configured to receive transmission time interval (ΤΉ) handover indication information sent by a radio network controller; The sending unit 902 is configured to send a control channel carrying a transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine, according to the transport format combination, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
在一实施例中, 发送单元 902 具体用于: 在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的 或可配置的或预留的; 或 发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定 义的, 或可配置的。 In an embodiment, the sending unit 902 is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication Information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or A separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) is sent to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
在另一实施例中, 发送单元 902具体用于:  In another embodiment, the sending unit 902 is specifically configured to:
当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量 UPH 值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到 切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者  Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold (E-DPCCH), to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI ,并且用户设备发送给基站的 UPH值 大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信 息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E- DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
用户设备还包括: 处理单元 903 , 用于控制用户设备在预定义或预配置的 时间点切换到与切换指示信息对应的目标 ΤΤΙ。  The user equipment further includes: a processing unit 903, configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
前述图 10实施例中的 ΤΤΙ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的用户设备, 通过前述对 ΤΤΙ切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技 术人员可以清楚的知道本实施例中用户设备的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的 筒洁, 在此不再详述。  The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing method of the ΤΤΙ ΤΤΙ 实施 实施 实施 同样 同样 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户 用户The implementation method of the user equipment, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
实施例十  Example ten
本实施例提供一种用户设备, 请参考图 12所示, 为用户设备的硬件实现 示例的概念图, 该用户设备包括: 接收器 1003 , 用于接收无线网络控制器发 送的传输时间间隔(ΤΤΙ )切换指示信息; 发送器 1004, 用于发送携带传输格 式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得基站能够基于传输格式组合确定用户设备已 收到切换指示信息。  This embodiment provides a user equipment. Referring to FIG. 12, it is a conceptual diagram of an example of hardware implementation of a user equipment. The user equipment includes: a receiver 1003, configured to receive a transmission time interval sent by a radio network controller. The switching indication information is sent to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transport format combination.
其中, 在图 12中, 总线架构 (用总线 1000来代表), 总线 1000可以包 括任意数量的互联的总线和桥, 总线 1000将包括由处理器 1001代表的一个 或多个处理器 1001和存储器 1002代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。 总 线 1000还可以将诸如外围设备、 稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电 路链接在一起, 这些都是本领域所公知的, 因此, 本文不再对其进行进一步 描述。总线接口 1005在总线 1000和接收器 1003、发送器 1004之间提供接口。 接收器 1003和发送器 1004可以是同一个元件, 即收发机, 提供用于在传输 介质上与各种其他装置通信的单元。 取决于用户设备的性质, 还可以提供用 户接口 1006, 例如小键盘、 显示器、 扬声器、 麦克风、 操纵杆。 Wherein, in FIG. 12, a bus architecture (represented by bus 1000), bus 1000 can include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, and bus 1000 will include one or more processors 1001 and memory 1002 represented by processor 1001. The various circuits representing the memory are linked together. Total Line 1000 can also link various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, as is well known in the art, and therefore, will not be further described herein. Bus interface 1005 provides an interface between bus 1000 and receiver 1003, transmitter 1004. Receiver 1003 and transmitter 1004 may be the same component, i.e., a transceiver, providing means for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium. A user interface 1006, such as a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, may also be provided depending on the nature of the user device.
处理器 1001负责管理总线 1000和通常的处理, 而存储器 1002可以被用 于存储处理器 1001在执行操作时所使用的数据。  The processor 1001 is responsible for managing the bus 1000 and the usual processing, and the memory 1002 can be used to store data used by the processor 1001 when performing operations.
在一实施例中, 发送器 1004 具体用于: 在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的 或可配置的或预留的; 或  In an embodiment, the transmitter 1004 is specifically configured to: carry an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication Information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定 义的, 或可配置的。  A separate Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) carrying a Non-Zero Transport Channel Format Consolidation Indication (TFCI) is sent to indicate that the user equipment has received handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
在另一实施例中, 发送器 1004具体用于:  In another embodiment, the transmitter 1004 is specifically configured to:
当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量 UPH 值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到 切换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者  Sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold (E-DPCCH), to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI ,并且用户设备发送给基站的 UPH值 大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示用户设备已接收到切换指示信 息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  When the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) is transmitted (E- DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
在以上各实施例中, 处理器 1001 , 用于控制用户设备在预定义或预配置 的时间点切换到与切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI。  In the above embodiments, the processor 1001 is configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information at a predefined or pre-configured time point.
前述图 10实施例中的 ΤΤΙ切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的用户设备, 通过前述对 TTI切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技 术人员可以清楚的知道本实施例中用户设备的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的 筒洁, 在此不再详述。 The various changes and specific examples in the ΤΤΙ switching method in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 10 are also suitable. For the user equipment in this embodiment, the method for implementing the user equipment in this embodiment can be clearly understood by those skilled in the art through the foregoing detailed description of the TTI handover method. Therefore, for the cleaning of the specification, details are not described herein again. .
实施例十一  Embodiment 11
在本实施例中, 提供了一种基站, 如图 13所示, 该基站包括: 第一接收 单元 1101 , 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的 TTI切换指示信息; 第二接收单 元 1102, 用于接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定用 户设备已收到切换指示信息。  In this embodiment, a base station is provided. As shown in FIG. 13, the base station includes: a first receiving unit 1101, configured to receive TTI handover indication information sent by a radio network controller; and a second receiving unit 1102, configured to: Receiving, by the user equipment, a control channel carrying a combination of transmission formats to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
在一实施例中, 基站还包括处理单元 1103 ,  In an embodiment, the base station further includes a processing unit 1103,
第二接收单元 1102 具体用于接收用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的 物理控制信道(DPCCH );  The second receiving unit 1102 is specifically configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI) that is prohibited by the user equipment to be carried in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), or to receive a separate sent by the user equipment. a physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI);
处理单元 1103 , 用于基于 E-TFCI来确认用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 基于 TFCI 来确认用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配 置的。  The processing unit 1103 is configured to confirm, according to the E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, the user equipment is confirmed based on the TFCI The handover indication information has been received, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
在另一实施例中, 基站还包括处理单元 1103 ,  In another embodiment, the base station further includes a processing unit 1103,
第二接收单元 1102具体用于当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且用 户设备发送给基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携 带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且用户设备发送 给基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH );  The second receiving unit 1102 is specifically configured to: when the current location of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and receive the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication sent by the user equipment. (E-TFC) an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or, when the current state of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the receiving user equipment sends the carrying number An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that enhances the dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI);
处理单元 1103 ,用于基于第一 E-TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切换指示信 息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 第二 E-TFCI确认用户设备 已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 进一步, 基站还包括译码单元 1104, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开 始以目标 ΤΉ译码用户设备发送的上行数据, 目标 ΤΉ与切换指示信息对应。 The processing unit 1103 is configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, the second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover. Indicates that the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable. Further, the base station further includes a decoding unit 1104, configured to start, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, the uplink data that is sent by the user equipment by the target ,, and the target 对应 corresponds to the handover indication information.
前述图 10实施例中的 TTI切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的基站, 通过前述对 ΤΉ切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技术人 员可以清楚的知道本实施例中基站的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的筒洁, 在 此不再详述。  The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing TTI switching method in the embodiment of FIG. 10 are also applicable to the base station in this embodiment. The detailed description of the foregoing switching method can be clearly known to those skilled in the art. The implementation method of the base station, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
实施例十二  Example twelve
在本实施例中, 提供一种基站, 请参考图 14, 为基站的硬件实现示例的 框图, 该基站包括: 第一接收器 1201 , 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的 TTI 切换指示信息; 第二接收器 1202 , 用于接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组 合的控制信道, 以确定用户设备已收到切换指示信息。  In this embodiment, a base station is provided. Referring to FIG. 14, a block diagram of an example of hardware implementation of a base station, where the base station includes: a first receiver 1201, configured to receive TTI handover indication information sent by a radio network controller; The second receiver 1202 is configured to receive a control channel that is sent by the user equipment and that carries the transport format combination, to determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
在图 14中, 编码器 1205可以从数据源接收数据并且从处理器 1203接收 控制信息。 编码器 1205为该数据、 控制信息以及参考信号提供各种信号处理 功能, 例如进行编码。 编码器 1205 将生成的符号提供给发射帧处理器 1206 以创建帧结构, 从而得到一系列帧。 然后将这些帧提供给发送器 1207, 其提 供各种信号调节功能, 包括放大、 滤波以及将帧调制到载波上, 以便通过天 线 1208在无线介质上进行传输。  In Figure 14, encoder 1205 can receive data from a data source and receive control information from processor 1203. Encoder 1205 provides various signal processing functions, such as encoding, for the data, control information, and reference signals. Encoder 1205 provides the generated symbols to transmit frame processor 1206 to create a frame structure resulting in a series of frames. These frames are then provided to a transmitter 1207 which provides various signal conditioning functions including amplification, filtering, and modulating the frame onto a carrier for transmission over the wireless medium over the antenna 1208.
而第一接收器 1201和第二接收器 1202通过天线 1208接收数据并对数据 进行处理已恢复调制到载波上的信息,将第一接收器 1201和第二接收器 1202 恢复的信息提供给接收帧处理器 1209, 其对每个帧进行解析, 译码器 1204对 帧进行解码, 并将成功解码的控制信号提供给处理器 1203 , 如果一些帧未能 由译码器 1204成功进行解码, 则处理器 1203还可以使用 ACK和 /或 NACK 协议来支持对那些帧的重传请求。  While the first receiver 1201 and the second receiver 1202 receive data through the antenna 1208 and process the data, the information modulated on the carrier is restored, and the information recovered by the first receiver 1201 and the second receiver 1202 is supplied to the received frame. The processor 1209 parses each frame, the decoder 1204 decodes the frame, and provides the successfully decoded control signal to the processor 1203. If some frames are not successfully decoded by the decoder 1204, the processing is performed. The keeper 1203 may also use ACK and/or NACK protocols to support retransmission requests for those frames.
处理器 1203可以提供各种功能, 包括定时, 外围接口, 电压调节、 电源 管理以及其他控制功能。 存储器 1210可以用于存储基站的数据和软件。  The processor 1203 can provide various functions including timing, peripheral interfaces, voltage regulation, power management, and other control functions. Memory 1210 can be used to store data and software for the base station.
在一实施例中, 第二接收器 1202具体用于接收用户设备在增强专用物理 控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 ( TFCI )的物理控制信道( DPCCH ); 处理器 1203 , 用于基于 E-TFCI来确认 用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配 置的或预留的; 或, 基于 TFCI来确认用户设备已收到切换指示信息, 其中, 非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 In an embodiment, the second receiver 1202 is specifically configured to receive an enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication that is prohibited by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). (E-TFCI), or, receiving a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format merge indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment; the processor 1203, configured to confirm that the user equipment has received based on the E-TFCI To the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, based on the TFCI, confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
在另一实施例中,第二接收器 1202具体用于当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且用户设备发送给基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收用户 设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用 物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且 用户设备发送给基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收用户设备发送的携带第二 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 处理器 1203 , 用于基于第一 E-TFCI确认用户设备已接收到切 换指示信息, 第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 第二 E-TFCI确认 用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。  In another embodiment, the second receiver 1202 is specifically configured to: when the current state of the user equipment is 2 ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, and the receiving user equipment sends the first carrier An enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) that enhances the dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); or, when the current frame of the user equipment is 10 ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, Receiving, by the user equipment, an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format merge indication (E-TFCI); the processor 1203, configured to confirm, according to the first E-TFCI, that the user equipment has received The handover indication information, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or the second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
进一步, 译码器 1204, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 TTI 译码用户设备发送的上行数据, 目标 TTI与切换指示信息对应。  Further, the decoder 1204 is configured to start, at a predefined or pre-configured time point, the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI, where the target TTI corresponds to the handover indication information.
前述图 10实施例中的 TTI切换方法中的各种变化方式和具体实例同样适 用于本实施例的基站, 通过前述对 ΤΉ切换方法的详细描述, 本领域技术人 员可以清楚的知道本实施例中基站的实施方法, 所以为了说明书的筒洁, 在 此不再详述。  The various changes and specific examples in the foregoing TTI switching method in the embodiment of FIG. 10 are also applicable to the base station in this embodiment. The detailed description of the foregoing switching method can be clearly known to those skilled in the art. The implementation method of the base station, so for the cleaning of the specification, it will not be described in detail here.
本发明实施例七至实施例十二, 提供了在用户设备接收到 ΤΉ的切换指 示信息后, 用户设备会向基站发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 使得基站 能够基于传输格式组合确定用户设备已接收到切换指示信息, 所以基站就可 以获知用户设备切换 ΤΉ的时机, 然后就可以知道何时以与切换指示信息对 应的目标 TTI来译码用户设备发送的上行数据, 所以基站不需要向现有技术 中那样在收到 RNC的重配信令后,按照切换前后两种 ΤΉ类型尝试解析而导 致浪费基站的硬件资源, 因此, 本发明实施例中的方法能够节约基站的硬件 资源。 The seventh to fourth embodiments of the present invention provide that after the user equipment receives the handover indication information of the UI, the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transport format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has been determined based on the transport format combination. After receiving the handover indication information, the base station can know the timing of the handover of the user equipment, and then can know when to decode the uplink data sent by the user equipment by using the target TTI corresponding to the handover indication information, so the base station does not need to In the technology, after receiving the reconfiguration signaling of the RNC, the hardware resources of the base station are wasted according to the two types of ΤΉ before and after the handover. Therefore, the method in the embodiment of the present invention can save the hardware of the base station. Resources.
本领域内的技术人员应明白, 本发明的实施例可提供为方法、 系统、 或 计算机程序产品。 因此, 本发明可采用完全硬件实施例、 完全软件实施例、 或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。 而且, 本发明可采用在一个或多个 其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质 (包括但不限于磁盘 存储器、 CD-ROM、 光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。  Those skilled in the art will appreciate that embodiments of the present invention can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present invention may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware. Moreover, the invention can take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
本发明是参照根据本发明实施例的方法、 设备(系统)、 和计算机程序产 品的流程图和 /或方框图来描述的。 应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图 和 /或方框图中的每一流程和 /或方框、 以及流程图和 /或方框图中的流程 和 /或方框的结合。 可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、 专用计算机、 嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器, 使得通 过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流 程图一个流程或多个流程和 /或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的 装置。  The present invention has been described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (system), and computer program products according to embodiments of the invention. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowcharts and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flow and/or blocks in the flowcharts and/or block diagrams can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device. Means for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of the flow chart.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设 备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中, 使得存储在该计算机可读存储器 中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品, 该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或 多个流程和 /或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。  The computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device. The apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上, 使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的 处理, 从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图 一个流程或多个流程和 /或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步 骤。  These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device. The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.
尽管已描述了本发明的优选实施例, 但本领域内的技术人员一旦得知了 基本创造性概念, 则可对这些实施例做出另外的变更和修改。 所以, 所附权 利要求意欲解释为包括优选实施例以及落入本发明范围的所有变更和修改。 脱离本发明实施例的精神和范围。 这样, 倘若本发明实施例的这些修改和变 型属于本发明权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内, 则本发明也意图包含这些 改动和变型在内。 While the preferred embodiment of the invention has been described, it will be understood that Therefore, the appended claims are intended to be interpreted as including the preferred embodiments and the modifications and The spirit and scope of the embodiments of the present invention are departed. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and modifications of the embodiments of the invention.

Claims

权 利 要 求 Rights request
1、 一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A ΤΉ switching method, characterized by including:
用户设备接收第一传输时间间隔 ( TTI )对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI 对应的第二配置信息; The user equipment receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first transmission time interval (TTI) and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI;
所述用户设备接收基站发送的切换指示信息; The user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station;
所述用户设备将当前 ΤΉ切换为与所述切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI,其 中, 所述当前 TTI为所述第一 TTI和所述第二 TTI其中之一, 所述目标 TTI 为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; The user equipment switches the current TTI to a target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information, wherein the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, and the target TTI is the third TTI. one TΉ and the other of said second TΉ;
所述用户设备以所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站。 The user equipment sends data to the base station with the target TTI.
2、 如权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫秒 ( ms ), 所述第二 TTI具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the first TTI is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TTI is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
3、 如权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述用户设备接收基 站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收到所述 切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留 的; 或 The user equipment carries a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format consolidation indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein, The prohibited E-TFCIs described above are predefined or configurable or reserved; or
所述用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物 理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
4、 如权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述用户设备接收基 站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 4. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余 量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第一增强专用传输信 道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所 述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配 置的; 或者, When the current TTI is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, then the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication (E -TFCI) enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable set; or,
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms ΤΤΙ, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示 所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可 配置的。 When the current TTI is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the user equipment sends a second enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication (E - Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) of -TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
5、 如权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述用户设备接收基 站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 5. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备以所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送控制信息或数据, 以 指示已接收到所述切换指示信息。 The user equipment sends control information or data with the uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ΤΉ to indicate that the handover indication information has been received.
6、 如权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述用户设备接收基 站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 6. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备使用专用物理控制信道(DPCCH ) 中的域信息来指示所述 用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 The user equipment uses domain information in a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
7、 如权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述用户设备接收基 站发送的切换指示信息之后, 还包括: 7. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息 给所述基站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 The user equipment sends confirmation information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover instruction information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
8、如权利要求 7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述用户设备以所述目标 TTI 发送数据给所述基站, 具体为: 8. The method of claim 7, wherein the user equipment sends data to the base station with the target TTI, specifically:
当所述用户设备以所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述用户设备 在发送完所述确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用所述第一 TTI发送数据给所述基 站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的整数; 或 When the user equipment sends data to the base station using the first TTI, the user equipment sends data to the base station using the first TTI after the next M subframes after sending the acknowledgment information, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; or
当所述用户设备以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述用户设备 在发送完所述确认信息后的下 N个连接帧号 (CF )后用所述第二 TTI发送 数据给所述基站, 其中 N为预定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零的整数。 When the user equipment sends data to the base station with the second TTI, the user equipment sends data with the second TTI after sending the next N connection frame numbers (CF) after sending the acknowledgment information. To the base station, where N is predefined or configurable, and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
9、 如权利要求 1-8中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备以 所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站之前, 还包括: 9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that, the user equipment is Before the target TTI sends data to the base station, it also includes:
所述用户设备清除混合自动重传请求 (HARQ )緩冲区中的数据; 所述用户设备重置上行增强实体, 将传输序列号 (TSN )置为 0。 The user equipment clears the data in the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) buffer; the user equipment resets the uplink enhancement entity and sets the transmission sequence number (TSN) to 0.
10、 如权利要求 1-8中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备接 收到基站发送的切换指示信息后, 还包括: 10. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that, after the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备将 HARQ緩存中的数据,构建为所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行 增强 /协议数据单元(MAC-i PDU ); The user equipment constructs the data in the HARQ cache into an uplink enhancement/protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the target TΉ;
所述用户设备重置 MAC-i/is实体, 将发送序列号 (TSN )置为 0。 The user equipment resets the MAC-i/is entity and sets the transmission sequence number (TSN) to 0.
11、 如权利要求 1-8中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备以 所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站, 具体包括: 11. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the user equipment sends data to the base station with the target TTI, specifically including:
所述用户设备删除未发送成功的切换前的 TTI对应的第一上行增强协议 数据单元(MAC-i PDU ); The user equipment deletes the first uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the TTI before the handover that was not successfully sent;
所述用户设备构建所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU , 其中, 在所述 第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相同; The user equipment constructs a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ, wherein the payloads in the second MAC-i PDU and in the first MAC-i PDU are the same;
所述用户设备发送所述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。 The user equipment sends the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI.
12、 如权利要求 1-8 中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当在所述第一 ΤΉ下和在所述第二 ΤΉ下, 使用相同的传输块大小 (TBS )表时, 所述用户 设备以所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站, 具体包括: 12. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein when the same transport block size (TBS) table is used under the first TΉ and under the second TΉ, The user equipment sends data to the base station using the target TTI, specifically including:
所述用户设备在物理层将未发送成功的切换前的 TTI对应的第一数据编 码为所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二数据; The user equipment encodes the first data corresponding to the TTI before the handover that has not been successfully sent at the physical layer into the second data corresponding to the target TTI;
所述用户设备发送所述第二数据。 The user equipment sends the second data.
13、 如权利要求 1-12任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在用户设备接收 第一 ΤΉ的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΉ的第二配置信息之前,所述方法还包括: 所述用户设备发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。 13. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein before the user equipment receives the first configuration information of the first TZ and the second configuration information of the second TZ, the method further includes: The user equipment sends capability indication information supporting ΤΉ handover.
14、 如权利要求 1-13中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 接收基站发送的切换指示信息, 具体为: 14. The method according to any one of claims 1-13, characterized in that the user equipment receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station, specifically:
所述用户设备接收基站发送的高速共享控制信道指令( HS-SCCH order )。 The user equipment receives a high-speed shared control channel order (HS-SCCH order) sent by the base station.
15、 如权利要求 1-14中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一配置 信息包括所述第一 TTI对应的第一增强专用信道媒质接入控制流(E-DCH MAC-d flow )参数, 所述第二配置信息包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。 15. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the first configuration information includes the first enhanced dedicated channel medium access control flow (E-DCH MAC) corresponding to the first TTI. -d flow) parameter, the second configuration information includes the second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TZ.
16、 如权利要求 15所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一配置信息还包括 所述第一 TTI对应的第一不连续发送( DTX )参数和 /或第一不连续接收( DRX ) 参数,所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 DTX参数和 /或第二 DRX参数;所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于确定发送包 含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认 信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 16. The method of claim 15, wherein the first configuration information further includes a first discontinuous transmission (DTX) parameter and/or a first discontinuous reception (DRX) corresponding to the first TTI. Parameters, the second configuration information also includes the second DTX parameter and/or the second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TZ; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information also includes the information used to determine the transmission The power of the control channel containing the ΤΉ handover indication confirmation information, where the ΤΉ handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
17、 一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 17. A ΤΉ switching method, characterized by including:
所述基站接收第一传输时间间隔 ( TTI )对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI 对应的第二配置信息; The base station receives first configuration information corresponding to a first transmission time interval (TTI) and second configuration information corresponding to a second TTI;
所述基站向用户设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示信息。 The base station sends switching indication information for TTI switching to the user equipment.
18、 如权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫 秒( ms ), 所述第二 TTI具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 18. The method of claim 17, wherein the first TTI is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TTI is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
19、 如权利要求 17或 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向用户 设备发送要求所述用户设备进行 TTI切换的切换指示信息之后, 所述方法还 包括: 19. The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that, after the base station sends the handover instruction information requiring the user equipment to perform TTI handover to the user equipment, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的确认信息。 The base station receives the confirmation information sent by the user equipment.
20、 如权利要求 19所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述基站向用户设备发送 要求所述用户设备进行 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息, 具体为: 20. The method of claim 19, wherein the base station sends handover instruction information to the user equipment requiring the user equipment to perform TΉ handover, specifically:
如果在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信息, 则重新发送所述 切换指示信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 If the base station does not receive the acknowledgment information within the maximum time, the base station resends the switching instruction information, wherein the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
21、 如权利要求 17或 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向用户 设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息后, 还包括: 21. The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that, after the base station sends the handover instruction information of TΉ handover to the user equipment, it further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携 带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ); 并基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用 的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 The base station receives the information carried by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). and confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is Predefined or configurable or reserved; or
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指 示(TFCI )的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); 并基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配 置的。 The base station receives a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment; and confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication based on the non-zero TFCI. information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
22、 如权利要求 17或 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向用户 设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息后, 还包括: 22. The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that, after the base station sends the handover indication information of TΉ handover to the user equipment, it further includes:
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且所述基站接收到的功率余量( UPH )值 小于第一阈值, 则所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 并基于 所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, When the current TTI is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than the first threshold, then the base station receives the first enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication ( E-TFCI) enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms TTI,并且所述基站接收到的功率余量( UPH ) 值大于第二阈值, 则所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 并基 于所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 When the current TTI type is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than the second threshold, the base station receives the second enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication sent by the user equipment. (E-TFCI) enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
23、 如权利要求 17-22中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向 用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息之后, 所述方法还包括: 23. The method according to any one of claims 17-22, characterized in that, after the base station sends the handover instruction information of the TZ handover to the user equipment, the method further includes:
所述基站向无线网络控制器发送上行增强实体重置指示或上行增强实体 重置指示。 The base station sends an uplink enhancement entity reset indication or an uplink enhancement entity reset indication to the radio network controller.
24、 如权利要求 17-23中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向 所述用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息之后, 所述方法还包括: 24. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 23, characterized in that, after the base station sends the handover instruction information of the ΤΉ handover to the user equipment, the method further includes:
所述基站发送所述用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线网络控制器。 The base station sends the switched target ΤΉ of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
25、 如权利要求 17-23中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述基站具有 关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 所述基站向所述用户 设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息, 具体为: 25. The method according to any one of claims 17-23, characterized in that the base station has To turn off the working mode of TΉ switching and to enable the working mode of TΉ switching, the base station sends the switching instruction information of TΉ switching to the user equipment, specifically:
在所述基站处于所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 所述基站向所述用户 设备发送 ΤΤΙ切换的切换指示信息。 When the base station is in the operating mode in which TTI handover is enabled, the base station sends TTI handover switching instruction information to the user equipment.
26、 如权利要求 25所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站处于所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下,所述基站接收无线网络控制器发送的指示信息, 并将 所述基站由所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式切换为所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模 式。 26. The method of claim 25, wherein when the base station is in the working mode of turning off TZ switching, the base station receives the instruction information sent by the wireless network controller, and switches the base station to the base station. The working mode of turning off TΉ switching is switched to the working mode of turning on TΉ switching.
27、 如权利要求 17-26中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站接 收第一 ΤΉ对应的第一配置信息和第二 ΤΤΙ对应的第二配置信息之前, 所述 方法还包括: 27. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 26, wherein before the base station receives the first configuration information corresponding to the first TΉ and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TΤ1, the method Also includes:
所述基站向无线网络控制器发送支持 ΤΤΙ切换的能力指示信息。 The base station sends capability indication information supporting TTI handover to the radio network controller.
28、 如权利要求 17-27中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站向 所述用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息的同时或之后, 所述方法还包括: 所述基站向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络控制器发送 所述指示信息给非服务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 ΤΤΙ。 28. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 27, characterized in that, while or after the base station sends the handover instruction information of TΉ handover to the user equipment, the method further includes: The base station sends indication information to the radio network controller, so that the radio network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after handover.
29、 如权利要求 28所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述指示信息中包含切换 至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。 29. The method of claim 28, wherein the instruction information includes time information for switching to the target ΤΉ.
30、 如权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一配置信息和 /或所 述第二配置信息还包括用于确定所述用户设备发送包含 ΤΤΙ切换指示确认信 息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 30. The method of claim 17, wherein the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information further includes a parameter for determining that the user equipment sends a control channel containing TTI handover indication confirmation information. Power, wherein the ΤΉ handover indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
31、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 31. A user equipment, characterized by: including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收第一传输时间间隔(ΤΤΙ )对应的第一配置信息 和第二 ΤΤΙ对应的第二配置信息; The first receiving unit is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first transmission time interval (TTI) and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI;
第二接收单元, 用于接收基站发送的切换指示信息, 并将所述切换指示 信息发送给切换单元; 所述切换单元, 用于从所述第二接收单元接收所述切换指示信息, 以及 将当前 ΤΉ切换为与所述切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI, 其中, 所述当前 TTI 为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 ΤΉ其中之一, 所述目标 TTI为所述第一 TTI和 所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; The second receiving unit is configured to receive the switching instruction information sent by the base station, and send the switching instruction information to the switching unit; The switching unit is configured to receive the switching indication information from the second receiving unit, and switch the current TTI to a target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information, wherein the current TTI is the first TTI and one of the second TTI, the target TTI is the other of the first TTI and the second TTI;
第一发送单元, 用于以所述目标 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站。 The first sending unit is used to send data to the base station with the target ΤΉ.
32、 如权利要求 31所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫秒( ms ), 所述第二 ΤΉ具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 32. The user equipment according to claim 31, wherein the first TΉ is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TΉ is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
33、 如权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 还包括: 33. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止 使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收 到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的 或预留的; 或 The second sending unit is configured to carry a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, Wherein, the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
用于发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信 道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非 零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 Used to send a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
34、 如权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 还包括: 34. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送 给所述基站的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指 示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或 可配置的; 或者, The second sending unit is configured to send a first enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication when the current TTI is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold. (E-TFCI) Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 When the current TΉ is 10ms TΉ, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, an enhancement carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) is sent Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
35、 如权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 还包括: 35. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于以所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送控制信息或数 据, 以指示已接收到所述切换指示信息。 The second sending unit is configured to send control information or data with the uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ΤΉ to indicate that the switching indication information has been received.
36、 如权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 还包括: 36. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于使用专用物理控制信道(DPCCH ) 中的域信息来指 示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 The second sending unit is configured to use domain information in the dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information.
37、 如权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备 还包括: 37. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确 认信息给所述基站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 The second sending unit is configured to send confirmation information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover instruction information, where the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
38、 如权利要求 37所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一发送单元具 体用于: 38. The user equipment according to claim 37, characterized in that the first sending unit is specifically used to:
当以所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述第一发送单元在所述第 二发送单元发送完所述确认信息后的下 M个子帧后用所述第一 TTI发送数据 给所述基站, 其中 M为预定义的或可配置的, M为大于等于零的整数; 或 当以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 所述第一发送单元在所述第 二发送单元发送完所述确认信息后的下 N个连接帧号 (CF )后用所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站, 其中 N为预定义的或可配置的, N为大于等于零 的整数。 When sending data to the base station with the first TTI, the first sending unit uses the first TTI to send data to the base station after the next M subframes after the second sending unit completes sending the acknowledgment information. The base station, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; or when sending data to the base station in the second TΉ, the first sending unit After the unit sends the next N connection frame numbers (CF) after the confirmation information, the unit uses the second TZ to send data to the base station, where N is predefined or configurable, and N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
39、 如权利要求 31-38中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户 设备还包括: 39. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 38, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
处理单元, 用于在所述第一发送单元以所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基 站之前, 清除混合自动重传请求( HARQ )緩冲区中的数据; 并重置上行增强 实体, 并将 TSN置为 0。 A processing unit configured to clear the data in the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) buffer before the first sending unit sends data to the base station with the target TTI; and reset the uplink enhancement entity, and TSN is set to 0.
40、 如权利要求 31-38中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户 设备还包括: 40. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 38, characterized in that: the user Equipment also includes:
处理单元, 用于在所述第二接收单元接收到所述基站发送的切换指示信 息后, 将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行增强协议数 据单元(MAC-i PDU ); 并重置上行增强实体, 将 TSN置为 0。 A processing unit configured to construct the data in the HARQ cache into an uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the target TΉ after the second receiving unit receives the handover instruction information sent by the base station. ; And reset the uplink enhancement entity and set TSN to 0.
41、 如权利要求 31-38中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一 发送单元具体用于: 41. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 38, characterized in that the first sending unit is specifically used to:
删除未发送成功的切换前的 TTI 对应的第一上行增强协议数据单元 ( MAC-i PDU ); 构建所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU, 其中, 在所述 第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相同; 并发送所 述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。 Delete the first uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the TTI before the handover that was not successfully sent; construct the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TΉ, wherein, in the second MAC-i PDU Neutralize and in the first MAC-i PDU, the payload is the same; and send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI.
42、 如权利要求 31-38中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 当在所述 第一 TTI下和在所述第二 TTI下, 使用相同的传输块大小 (TBS )表时, 所 述用户设备还包括: 42. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 38, characterized in that when the same transport block size (TBS) table is used under the first TTI and under the second TTI , the user equipment also includes:
编码单元, 用于在物理层将未发送成功的所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一数据 编码为所述第二 TTI对应的第二数据, 并将所述第二数据发送给所述第一发 送单元; An encoding unit, configured to encode the first data corresponding to the first TTI that has not been successfully sent into the second data corresponding to the second TTI at the physical layer, and send the second data to the first sender unit;
所述第一发送单元具体用于从所述编码单元接收所述第二数据, 并发送 所述第二数据。 The first sending unit is specifically configured to receive the second data from the encoding unit and send the second data.
43、 如权利要求 31-42中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户 设备还包括: 43. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 42, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
第三发送单元, 用于发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。 The third sending unit is used to send capability indication information supporting ΤΉ handover.
44、 如权利要求 31-43中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第二 接收单元具体用于接收基站发送的高速共享控制信道指令( HS-SCCH order )。 44. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 43, characterized in that the second receiving unit is specifically configured to receive a high-speed shared control channel order (HS-SCCH order) sent by the base station.
45、 如权利要求 31-44中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一 配置信息包括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一增强专用信道媒质接入控制流( E-DCH MAC-d flow )参数, 所述第二配置信息包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。 45. The user equipment according to any one of claims 31 to 44, wherein the first configuration information includes the first enhanced dedicated channel medium access control flow (E-DCH) corresponding to the first TZ MAC-d flow) parameter, the second configuration information includes the second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TT.
46、 如权利要求 45所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一配置信息还 包括所述第一 TTI对应的第一不连续发送(DTX )参数和 /或第一不连续接收46. The user equipment according to claim 45, wherein the first configuration information further includes a first discontinuous transmission (DTX) parameter corresponding to the first TTI and/or a first discontinuous reception.
( DRX )参数, 所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 DTX参数 和 /或第二 DRX参数; 所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于 确定发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 TTI切 换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 (DRX) parameter, the second configuration information also includes the second DTX parameter and/or the second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TZ; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information also includes the user Determining the power of sending a control channel including TTI switching indication confirmation information, wherein the TTI switching indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the switching indication information.
47、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 47. A user equipment, characterized by including:
接收器, 用于接收第一传输时间间隔(ΤΉ )对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息; 并接收基站发送的切换指示信息; A receiver, configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first transmission time interval (TΉ) and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI; and receive the switching instruction information sent by the base station;
处理器, 用于基于所述切换指示信息, 将当前 ΤΉ切换为与所述切换指 示信息对应的目标 TTI, 其中, 所述当前 ΤΉ为所述第一 ΤΉ和所述第二 TTI 其中之一, 所述目标 ΤΉ为所述第一 TTI和所述第二 ΤΉ的另一个; A processor configured to switch the current TTI to a target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information based on the switching indication information, where the current TTI is one of the first TTI and the second TTI, The target TTI is the other of the first TTI and the second TTI;
发送器, 用于以所述目标 TTI发送数据给所述基站。 A transmitter, configured to send data to the base station with the target TTI.
48、 如权利要求 47所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫秒( ms ), 所述第二 ΤΉ具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 48. The user equipment according to claim 47, wherein the first TΉ is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TΉ is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
49、 如权利要求 47或 48所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具 体用于在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信 息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 49. The user equipment according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the transmitter is specifically configured to carry a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format merging indication (E-DPCCH) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). -TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
用于发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信 道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非 零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 Used to send a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or configurable.
50、 如权利要求 47或 48所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具 体用于: 当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功 率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并 指示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备 已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的;或者, 当所述当前 ΤΉ为 10ms ΤΤΙ, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率 余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 50. The user equipment according to claim 47 or 48, characterized in that the transmitter is specifically configured to: when the current TTI is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom sent by the user equipment to the base station ( UPH) value is less than the first threshold, sending an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information , the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, When the current TTI is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, an enhancement carrying a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) is sent Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
51、 如权利要求 47或 48所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具 体用于以所述目标 ΤΉ对应的上行扰码发送控制信息或数据, 以指示已接收 到所述切换指示信息。 51. The user equipment according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the transmitter is specifically configured to send control information or data with an uplink scrambling code corresponding to the target ΤΉ to indicate that the switching indication has been received. information.
52、 如权利要求 47或 48所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具 体用于使用专用物理控制信道(DPCCH ) 中的域信息来指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息。 52. The user equipment according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the transmitter is specifically configured to use domain information in a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication. information.
53、 如权利要求 47或 48所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具 体用于在接收到所述切换指示信息后的最大时间内发送确认信息给所述基 站, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 53. The user equipment according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the transmitter is specifically configured to send confirmation information to the base station within a maximum time after receiving the handover instruction information, wherein, the The maximum time is predefined or configurable.
54、 如权利要求 53所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器还用于: 当以所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 在发送完所述确认信息后的 下 Μ个子帧后用所述第一 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站,其中 Μ为预定义的或可 配置的, Μ为大于等于零的整数; 或 54. The user equipment according to claim 53, wherein the transmitter is further configured to: when sending data to the base station in the first TΉ, after sending the confirmation information, in the next M Use the first ΤΉ to send data to the base station after the subframe, where M is predefined or configurable, and M is an integer greater than or equal to zero; or
当以所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站时, 在发送完所述确认信息后的 下 Ν个连接帧号 ( CF )后用所述第二 ΤΉ发送数据给所述基站, 其中 Ν为 预定义的或可配置的, Ν为大于等于零的整数。 When sending data to the base station using the second TΉ, use the second TΉ to send data to the base station after the next N connection frame numbers (CF) after sending the acknowledgment information, where N is Predefined or configurable, N is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
55、 如权利要求 47-54中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理 器还用于清除混合自动重传请求( HARQ )緩冲区中的数据; 并重置上行增强 实体, 将 TSN置为 0。 55. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47-54, characterized in that the processor is also configured to clear data in a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) buffer; and reset the uplink enhancement Entity, set TSN to 0.
56、 如权利要求 47-54中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理 器还用于将 HARQ緩存中的数据, 构建为所述目标 ΤΤΙ对应的 MAC-i PDU 56. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47-54, characterized in that the processor is also configured to construct the data in the HARQ cache into a MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI
(上行增强协议数据单元); 重置上行增强实体, 将 TSN置为 0。 (Uplink Enhanced Protocol Data Unit); Reset the uplink enhanced entity and set TSN to 0.
57、 如权利要求 47-54中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器还用于删除未发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一上行增强 协议数据单元 ( MAC-i PDU ); 构建所述目标 TTI对应的第二 MAC-i PDU, 其中, 在所述第二 MAC-i PDU中和在所述第一 MAC-i PDU中, 有效载荷相 同; 57. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47-54, characterized in that, The processor is also configured to delete the first uplink enhanced protocol data unit (MAC-i PDU) corresponding to the pre-switching TTI that has not been successfully sent; and construct a second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target TTI, wherein, The payload in the second MAC-i PDU is the same as in the first MAC-i PDU;
所述发送器用于发送所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二 MAC-i PDU。 The transmitter is used to send the second MAC-i PDU corresponding to the target ΤΉ.
58、 如权利要求 47-54中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户 设备还包括编码器, 用于在物理层将未发送成功的切换前的 ΤΉ对应的第一 数据编码为所述目标 ΤΉ对应的第二数据; 58. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47 to 54, characterized in that the user equipment further includes an encoder for transmitting, at the physical layer, the first data corresponding to the ΤΉ before successful handover. Encoded as second data corresponding to the target ΤΉ;
所述发送器用于发送所述第二数据。 The transmitter is used to send the second data.
59、 如权利要求 47-58中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送 器还用于发送支持 ΤΉ切换的能力指示信息。 59. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47-58, characterized in that the transmitter is also configured to send capability indication information that supports ΤΉ handover.
60、 如权利要求 47-59中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述接收 器还用于接收基站发送的高速共享控制信道指令( HS-SCCH order )。 60. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47 to 59, wherein the receiver is further configured to receive a high-speed shared control channel order (HS-SCCH order) sent by the base station.
61、 如权利要求 47-60中任一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一 配置信息包括所述第一 ΤΉ对应的第一增强专用信道媒质接入控制流( E-DCH MAC-d flow )参数, 所述第二配置信息包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 E-DCH MAC-d flow参数。 61. The user equipment according to any one of claims 47 to 60, wherein the first configuration information includes the first enhanced dedicated channel medium access control flow (E-DCH) corresponding to the first TZ MAC-d flow) parameter, the second configuration information includes the second E-DCH MAC-d flow parameter corresponding to the second TT.
62、 如权利要求 61所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一配置信息还 包括所述第一 TTI对应的第一不连续发送(DTX )参数和 /或第一不连续接收 62. The user equipment according to claim 61, wherein the first configuration information further includes a first discontinuous transmission (DTX) parameter and/or a first discontinuous reception corresponding to the first TTI.
( DRX )参数, 所述第二配置信息还包括所述第二 ΤΉ对应的第二 DTX参数 和 /或第二 DRX参数; 所述第一配置信息和 /或所述第二配置信息还包括用于 确定发送包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 其中, 所述 TTI切 换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息。 (DRX) parameter, the second configuration information also includes the second DTX parameter and/or the second DRX parameter corresponding to the second TZ; the first configuration information and/or the second configuration information also includes the user Determining the power of sending a control channel including TTI switching indication confirmation information, wherein the TTI switching indication confirmation information is used to indicate that the user equipment has received the switching indication information.
63、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 63. A base station, characterized by including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收第一传输时间间隔(TTI )对应的第一配置信息 和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息; The first receiving unit is configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first transmission time interval (TTI) and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI;
第一发送单元, 用于向用户设备发送 TTI切换的切换指示信息。 The first sending unit is configured to send switching indication information of TTI switching to the user equipment.
64、 如权利要求 63所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫 秒( ms ), 所述第二 TTI具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 64. The base station according to claim 63, wherein the first TTI is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TTI is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
65、 如权利要求 63或 64所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的确认信息。 65. The base station according to claim 63 or 64, characterized in that the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the confirmation information sent by the user equipment.
66、 如权利要求 65所述的基站, 其特征在于, 第一发送单元具体还用于 如果在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信息, 则重新发送所述切换 指示信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 66. The base station according to claim 65, wherein the first sending unit is further configured to resend the switching instruction information if the base station does not receive the confirmation information within a maximum time, wherein , the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
67、 如权利要求 63或 64所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 67. The base station according to claim 63 or 64, characterized in that, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive the enhanced dedicated physical control channel of the user equipment.
( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示The prohibited Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) carried in (E-DPCCH); or, for receiving a separate carrying non-zero Transport Channel Format Combination Indication sent by the user equipment
( TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); (TFCI) Physical Control Channel (DPCCH);
处理单元,用于基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指 示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的;或, 用于基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其 中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 A processing unit configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or, Used to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
68、 如权利要求 63或 64所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第二接收单元, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ为 2ms ΤΉ , 并且所述基站接收到的 功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一增强 专用传输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 或, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms TTI, 并且所述基站接收到的功率余量 ( UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ); 68. The base station according to claim 63 or 64, characterized in that, the base station further includes: a second receiving unit, used for when the current TΉ is 2ms TΉ, and the power headroom received by the base station ( UPH) value is less than the first threshold, receiving an enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying a first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment or, used when the current TΉ The type is 10ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is greater than the second threshold, receiving the enhanced dedicated physical transmission carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment Control channel (E-DPCCH);
处理单元,用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切 换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于所述第 二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的。 A processing unit configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, configured to confirm based on the first E-TFCI The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
69、 如权利要求 63-68中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包 括: 69. The base station according to any one of claims 63-68, characterized in that the base station further includes:
第二发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送上行增强实体重置指示或上 行增强实体重置指示。 The second sending unit is configured to send an uplink enhancement entity reset indication or an uplink enhancement entity reset indication to the radio network controller.
70、 如权利要求 63-69中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包 括: 70. The base station according to any one of claims 63-69, characterized in that the base station further includes:
第三发送单元, 用于发送所述用户设备的切换后的目标 TTI给无线网络 控制器。 The third sending unit is configured to send the switched target TTI of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
71、 如权利要求 63-69中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站具有 关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 所述第一发送单元具 体用于在在所述基站处于所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 向所述用户设备 发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。 71. The base station according to any one of claims 63 to 69, characterized in that, the base station has an operating mode of turning off ΤΉ switching and an operating mode of turning on ΤΉ switching, and the first transmitting unit is specifically used in The base station is in the operating mode in which TΉ handover is enabled, and sends TΉ handover switching instruction information to the user equipment.
72、 如权利要求 71所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第三接收单元, 用于在所述基站处于所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式下, 接收所述无线网络控制器发送的指示信息, 并将所述指示信息发送给切换单 元; 72. The base station according to claim 71, characterized in that, the base station further includes: a third receiving unit, configured to receive the wireless network controller when the base station is in the working mode of turning off TΉ switching. Send the instruction information, and send the instruction information to the switching unit;
所述切换单元, 用于基于所述指示信息将所述基站由所述关闭 TTI切换 的工作模式切换为所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。 The switching unit is configured to switch the base station from the working mode of turning off TTI switching to the working mode of turning on TTI switching based on the indication information.
73、 如权利要求 63-72中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包 括: 73. The base station according to any one of claims 63-72, characterized in that the base station further includes:
第四发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制器发送支持 TTI切换的能力指示信 息。 The fourth sending unit is used to send capability indication information supporting TTI switching to the radio network controller.
74、 如权利要求 63-73中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包 括: 74. The base station according to any one of claims 63-73, characterized in that the base station further includes:
第五发送单元, 用于向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络 控制器发送所述指示信息给非服务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后 的目标 ΤΉ。 The fifth sending unit is configured to send indication information to the wireless network controller, so that the wireless network controller sends the indication information to the non-serving base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the switched target TΉ.
75、 如权利要求 74所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述指示信息中包含切换 至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。 75. The base station according to claim 74, wherein the indication information includes time information for switching to the target ΤΉ.
76、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 76. A base station, characterized by including:
接收器, 用于接收第一传输时间间隔(ΤΉ )对应的第一配置信息和第二 TTI对应的第二配置信息; A receiver, configured to receive the first configuration information corresponding to the first transmission time interval (TΉ) and the second configuration information corresponding to the second TTI;
发送器, 用于向用户设备发送 ΤΉ切换的切换指示信息。 A transmitter, configured to send switching indication information of ΤΉ switching to the user equipment.
77、 如权利要求 76所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述第一 ΤΉ具体为 2毫 秒( ms ), 所述第二 TTI具体为 10毫秒( ms )。 77. The base station according to claim 76, wherein the first TTI is specifically 2 milliseconds (ms), and the second TTI is specifically 10 milliseconds (ms).
78、 如权利要求 76或 77所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述接收器还用于: 接收所述用户设备发送的确认信息。 78. The base station according to claim 76 or 77, wherein the receiver is further configured to: receive confirmation information sent by the user equipment.
79、 如权利要求 78所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述发送器还用于: 如果 在最大时间内, 所述基站未接收到所述确认信息, 则重新发送所述切换指示 信息, 其中, 所述最大时间为预定义的或可配置的。 79. The base station of claim 78, wherein the transmitter is further configured to: if the base station does not receive the confirmation information within a maximum time, resend the switching indication information, wherein , the maximum time is predefined or configurable.
80、 如权利要求 76或 77所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第一处理器, 80. The base station according to claim 76 or 77, characterized in that, the base station further includes: a first processor,
所述接收器还用于: 用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ); 或, 用于接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 ( TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); The receiver is also configured to: receive a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) carried by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH); or, to receive A separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
所述第一处理器用于基于所述 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切 换指示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 用于基于所述非零 TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The first processor is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; Or, be used to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the non-zero TFCI, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
81、 如权利要求 76或 77所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括: 第一处理器, 81. The base station according to claim 76 or 77, characterized in that, the base station further includes: a first processor,
所述接收器还用于: 用于当所述当前 TTI为 2ms TTI, 并且所述基站接收 到的功率余量(UPH )值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第一 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )或, 用于当所述当前 ΤΉ类型为 10ms ΤΉ, 并且所述基站接收 到的功率余量(UPH )值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); The receiver is also configured to: when the current TTI is a 2ms TTI, and the power headroom (UPH) value received by the base station is less than a first threshold, receive a message sent by the user equipment carrying the first Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) of Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) or, used when the current TΉ type is 10ms TΉ, and the power headroom (UPH) received by the base station The value is greater than the second threshold, receiving the Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the second Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
所述第一处理器用于: 基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到 所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或, 用于基于 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 The first processor is configured to: confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, Confirming that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, where the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
82、 如权利要求 76-81中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述发送器还 用于: 向无线网络控制器发送上行增强实体重置指示上行增强实体重置指示。 82. The base station according to any one of claims 76-81, wherein the transmitter is further configured to: send an uplink enhancement entity reset indication to the radio network controller.
83、 如权利要求 76-82中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述发送器还 用于: 发送所述用户设备的切换后的目标 ΤΉ给无线网络控制器。 83. The base station according to any one of claims 76-82, wherein the transmitter is further configured to: send the switched target ΤΉ of the user equipment to the radio network controller.
84、 如权利要求 76-82中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站具有 关闭 ΤΉ切换的工作模式和开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式, 所述发送器具体用于: 在所述基站处于所述开启 TTI切换的工作模式下, 向所述用户设备发送 TTI 切换的切换指示信息。 84. The base station according to any one of claims 76 to 82, characterized in that the base station has an operating mode of turning off ΤΉ switching and an operating mode of turning on ΤΉ switching, and the transmitter is specifically used to: in the When the base station is in the working mode in which TTI switching is enabled, the base station sends switching indication information of TTI switching to the user equipment.
85、 如权利要求 84所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述接收器用于在所述基 站处于所述关闭 TTI切换的工作模式下, 接收无线网络控制器发送的指示信 息; 85. The base station according to claim 84, wherein the receiver is configured to receive indication information sent by the wireless network controller when the base station is in the working mode of turning off TTI switching;
所述基站还包括第二处理器, 用于将所述基站由所述关闭 ΤΉ切换的工 作模式切换为所述开启 ΤΉ切换的工作模式。 The base station further includes a second processor, configured to switch the base station from the working mode of turning off TZ switching to the working mode of turning on TZ switching.
86、 如权利要求 76-85中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述发送器用 于向无线网络控制器发送支持 TTI切换的能力指示信息。 86. The base station according to any one of claims 76 to 85, characterized in that the transmitter is used to send capability indication information supporting TTI switching to the radio network controller.
87、 如权利要求 76-86中任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述发送器用 于向无线网络控制发送指示信息, 以使所述无线网络控制器发送所述指示信 息给非服务基站, 以使所述非服务基站切换至切换后的目标 TTI。 87. The base station according to any one of claims 76-86, characterized in that the transmitter is used to send indication information to the wireless network controller, so that the wireless network controller sends the indication information to a non-server The base station, so that the non-serving base station switches to the target TTI after switching.
88、 如权利要求 87所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述指示信息中包含切换 至所述目标 ΤΉ的时间信息。 88. The base station according to claim 87, wherein the indication information includes time information for switching to the target ΤΉ.
89、 一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 89. A ΤΉ switching method, characterized by including:
用户设备接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔( TTI )切换指示信息; 所述用户设备发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基站 能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 The user equipment receives the transmission time interval (TTI) switching indication information sent by the radio network controller; the user equipment sends a control channel carrying the transmission format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine the user equipment based on the transmission format combination The switching instruction information has been received.
90、 如权利要求 89所述的方法, 所述用户设备发送携带传输格式组合的 控制信道具体为: 90. The method of claim 89, wherein the user equipment sends a control channel carrying a transport format combination specifically as follows:
所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的 增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收到所述 切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留 的; 或 The user equipment carries a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format consolidation indication (E-TFCI) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein, The prohibited E-TFCIs described above are predefined or configurable or reserved; or
所述用户设备发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物 理控制信道(DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The user equipment sends a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined , or configurable.
91、 如权利要求 89所述的方法, 所述用户设备发送携带传输格式组合的 控制信道具体为: 91. The method of claim 89, the user equipment sending a control channel carrying a transport format combination is specifically:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第一增强专用 传输信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以 指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的 或可配置的; 或者, When the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, then the user equipment sends a first enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication ( E-TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则所述用户设备发送携带第二增强专用传输信 道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所 述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息,所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配 置的。 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, then the user equipment sends a second enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI ) of the Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
92、如权利要求 89-91中任一项所述的方法,所述 ΤΉ切换指示信息中包 含第一增益因子和第二增益因子, 所述第一增益因子用于确定所述用户设备 发送不包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 所述第二增益因子用 于确定所述用户设备发送包含 TTI切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率; 其 中, 所述 TTI切换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指 示信息。 92. The method according to any one of claims 89-91, the ΤΉ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, the first gain factor is used to determine whether the user equipment sends The power of the control channel containing TTI switching indication confirmation information, the second gain factor is used to determine the power of the control channel that the user equipment sends containing TTI switching indication confirmation information; wherein, the TTI switching indication confirmation information is used to indicate The user equipment has received the switching indication information.
93、 如权利要求 89所述的方法, 所述用户设备发送携带传输格式组合的 控制信道给基站后, 还包括: 93. The method of claim 89, after the user equipment sends the control channel carrying the transmission format combination to the base station, it further includes:
所述用户设备在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与所述切换指示信息对 应的目标 TTI。 The user equipment switches to the target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information at a predefined or preconfigured time point.
94、 一种 ΤΉ切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 94. A ΤΉ switching method, characterized by including:
基站接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔 (ΤΉ )切换指示信息; 所述基站接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定所 述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 The base station receives the transmission time interval (ΤΉ) switching indication information sent by the wireless network controller; the base station receives the control channel carrying the transmission format combination sent by the user equipment to determine that the user equipment has received the switching indication information.
95、 如权利 94所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述基站接收用户设备发送的 携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 具体为: 95. The method according to claim 94, characterized in that the base station receives a control channel carrying a transmission format combination sent by the user equipment, specifically:
所述基站接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携 带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ), 并基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用 的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 The base station receives the prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format consolidation indication (E-TFCI) carried by the user equipment in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirms the user based on the E-TFCI The device has received the switching indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指 示(TFCI )的物理控制信道(DPCCH ), 并基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设 备已收到所述切换指示信息,其中,所述非零 TFCI是预定义的,或可配置的。 The base station receives a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment, and confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the TFCI. , wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
96、 如权利 94所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述基站接收用户设备发送的 携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 具体为: 96. The method according to claim 94, characterized in that the base station receives a control channel carrying a transmission format combination sent by the user equipment, specifically:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带 第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 并基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换 指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, When the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, the base station receives the carrying power sent by the user equipment. Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) of the first Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI), and confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, so The first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or,
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的携带第二增 强专用传输信道格式合并指示 ( E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ), 并基于所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换 指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, the base station receives the second enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication sent by the user equipment. (E-TFCI) enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH), and confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the second E-TFCI, the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
97、 基于权利要求 94所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述基站接收用户设 备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道后, 还包括: 97. The method according to claim 94, characterized in that, after the base station receives the control channel carrying the transmission format combination sent by the user equipment, it further includes:
所述基站在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 TTI译码所述用户设备 发送的上行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。 The base station starts decoding the uplink data sent by the user equipment with a target TTI at a predefined or preconfigured time point, and the target TTI corresponds to the handover indication information.
98、如权利要求 94-97中任一项所述的方法,所述 ΤΉ切换指示信息中包 含第一增益因子和第二增益因子, 所述第一增益因子用于确定所述用户设备 发送不包含 ΤΉ切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率, 所述第二增益因子用 于确定所述用户设备发送包含 TTI切换指示确认信息的控制信道的功率; 其 中, 所述 TTI切换指示确认信息用来指示所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指 示信息。 98. The method according to any one of claims 94-97, the ΤΉ handover indication information includes a first gain factor and a second gain factor, the first gain factor is used to determine whether the user equipment sends The power of the control channel containing TTI switching indication confirmation information, the second gain factor is used to determine the power of the control channel that the user equipment sends containing TTI switching indication confirmation information; wherein, the TTI switching indication confirmation information is used to indicate The user equipment has received the switching indication information.
99、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 99. A user equipment, characterized by including:
接收单元, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔(TTI )切换指 示信息; A receiving unit, configured to receive transmission time interval (TTI) switching instruction information sent by the wireless network controller;
发送单元, 用于发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基 站能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 A sending unit, configured to send a control channel carrying a transmission format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transmission format combination.
100、 如权利要求 99所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元具体 用于: 在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传 输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信 息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 100. The user equipment according to claim 99, characterized in that the sending unit is specifically configured to: carry a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format merging indication (E-DPCCH) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or Send a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or may be configured.
101、 如权利要求 99所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元具体 用于: 101. The user equipment according to claim 99, characterized in that the sending unit is specifically used to:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式 合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, then the transmission carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) Enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, then the enhanced dedicated transport channel format merging indication (E-TFCI) carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel is sent. Physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
102、 如权利要求 99所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备还包 括: 102. The user equipment according to claim 99, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
处理单元, 用于控制所述用户设备在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与 所述切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI。 A processing unit configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information at a predefined or preconfigured time point.
103、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 103. A user equipment, characterized by: including:
接收器, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔( ΤΉ )切换指示 信息; A receiver, configured to receive transmission time interval (ΤΉ) switching indication information sent by the wireless network controller;
发送器, 用于发送携带传输格式组合的控制信道给基站, 使得所述基站 能够基于所述传输格式组合确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 A transmitter, configured to send a control channel carrying a transmission format combination to the base station, so that the base station can determine that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the transmission format combination.
104、 如权利要求 103所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具体用 于: 在增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ) 中携带禁止使用的增强专用传输 信道格式合并指示(E-TFCI )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或 发送单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示 (TFCI ) 的物理控制信道 ( DPCCH )来指示所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 104. The user equipment according to claim 103, wherein the transmitter is specifically configured to: carry a prohibited enhanced dedicated transport channel format merging indication (E-DPCCH) in the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH). TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved; or Send a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, wherein the non-zero TFCI is predefined, or may be configured.
105、 如权利要求 103所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述发送器具体用 于: 105. The user equipment according to claim 103, characterized in that the transmitter is specifically used for:
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI ,并且所述用户设备发送给所述基 站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 则发送携带第一增强专用传输信道格式 合并指示(E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道(E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户 设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than the first threshold, then the transmission carries the first enhanced dedicated transport channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) Enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or
当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI , 并且所述用户设备发送给所述 基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 则发送携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指 示( E-TFCI )的增强专用物理控制信道( E-DPCCH ), 以指示所述用户设备已 接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的。 When the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, then the enhanced dedicated transport channel format merging indication (E-TFCI) carrying the second enhanced dedicated transport channel is sent. Physical control channel (E-DPCCH) to indicate that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
106、 如权利要求 103所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备还包 括: 106. The user equipment according to claim 103, characterized in that the user equipment further includes:
处理器, 用于控制所述用户设备在预定义或预配置的时间点切换到与所 述切换指示信息对应的目标 TTI。 A processor, configured to control the user equipment to switch to the target TTI corresponding to the switching indication information at a predefined or preconfigured time point.
107、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 107. A base station, characterized by including:
第一接收单元, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔(ΤΉ )切 换指示信息; The first receiving unit is configured to receive the transmission time interval (ΤΉ) switching indication information sent by the wireless network controller;
第二接收单元, 用于接收用户设备发送的携带传输格式组合的控制信道, 以确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 The second receiving unit is configured to receive the control channel carrying the transmission format combination sent by the user equipment to determine that the user equipment has received the switching indication information.
108、 如权利要求 107所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括处理单 元, 108. The base station according to claim 107, characterized in that, the base station further includes a processing unit,
所述第二接收单元具体用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); The second receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the prohibited Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) carried by the user equipment in the Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH), Or, receive a separate physical control channel (DPCCH) carrying a non-zero transport channel format combination indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
所述处理单元, 用于基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切 换指示信息,其中,所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所 述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The processing unit is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. ; Or, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the TFCI, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
109、 如权利要求 107所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括处理单 元, 109. The base station according to claim 107, characterized in that, the base station further includes a processing unit,
所述第二接收单元具体用于当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI,并且 所述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用 户设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专 用物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设 备发送的携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物 理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); The second receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the carried power sent by the user equipment when the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the power headroom UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is less than a first threshold. Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) of the first Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI); or, when the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the user equipment sends it to the base station The UPH value is greater than the second threshold, receiving the Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the second Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment;
所述处理单元, 用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所 述切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是 预定义的或可配置的。 The processing unit is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, the third E-TFCI The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
110、 如权利要求 107所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括译码单 元, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 TTI译码所述用户设备发送 的上行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。 110. The base station of claim 107, wherein the base station further includes a decoding unit configured to start decoding the uplink data sent by the user equipment with a target TTI at a predefined or preconfigured time point, The target ΤΉ corresponds to the switching instruction information.
111、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 111. A base station, characterized in that it includes:
第一接收器, 用于接收无线网络控制器发送的传输时间间隔( ΤΉ )切换 指示信息; The first receiver is configured to receive the transmission time interval (ΤΉ) switching indication information sent by the wireless network controller;
第二接收器, 用于接收用户设备发送的单独的携带传输格式组合的控制 信道, 以确定所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息。 The second receiver is configured to receive a separate control channel carrying a transmission format combination sent by the user equipment to determine that the user equipment has received the switching indication information.
112、如权利要求 111所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括处理器, 所述第二接收器具体用于接收所述用户设备在增强专用物理控制信道112. The base station according to claim 111, characterized in that, the base station further includes a processor, and the second receiver is specifically configured to receive the user equipment’s information on the enhanced dedicated physical control channel.
( E-DPCCH )中携带的禁止使用的增强专用传输信道格式合并指示( E-TFCI ), 或, 接收所述用户设备发送的单独的携带非零传输信道格式合并指示(TFCI ) 的物理控制信道(DPCCH ); The prohibited Enhanced Dedicated Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (E-TFCI) carried in (E-DPCCH), or, receiving a separate physical control channel carrying a non-zero Transport Channel Format Combination Indication (TFCI) sent by the user equipment (DPCCH);
所述处理器,用于基于所述 E-TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换 指示信息, 其中, 所述禁止使用的 E-TFCI是预定义的或可配置的或预留的; 或, 基于所述 TFCI来确认所述用户设备已收到所述切换指示信息, 其中, 所 述非零 TFCI是预定义的, 或可配置的。 The processor is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the E-TFCI, wherein the prohibited E-TFCI is predefined or configurable or reserved. ; Or, confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the TFCI, where the non-zero TFCI is predefined or configurable.
113、如权利要求 111所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括处理器, 所述第二接收器具体用于当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 2ms TTI,并且所 述用户设备发送给所述基站的功率余量 UPH值小于第一阈值, 接收所述用户 设备发送的携带第一增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用 物理控制信道 ( E-DPCCH ); 或, 当所述用户设备的当前 ΤΉ为 10ms TTI, 并且所述用户设备发送给所述基站的 UPH值大于第二阈值, 接收所述用户设 备发送的携带第二增强专用传输信道格式合并指示 (E-TFCI ) 的增强专用物 理控制信道(E-DPCCH ); 113. The base station according to claim 111, characterized in that, the base station further includes a processor, and the second receiver is specifically configured to when the current TTI of the user equipment is 2ms TTI, and the user equipment sends The power headroom UPH value given to the base station is less than the first threshold, and receiving the enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) carrying the first enhanced dedicated transmission channel format combination indication (E-TFCI) sent by the user equipment; or , when the current TTI of the user equipment is 10ms TTI, and the UPH value sent by the user equipment to the base station is greater than the second threshold, receive the second enhanced dedicated transmission channel format merging indication (E - Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) of TFCI);
所述处理器,用于基于所述第一 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述 切换指示信息, 所述第一 E-TFCI 是预定义的或可配置的; 或者, 所述第二 E-TFCI确认所述用户设备已接收到所述切换指示信息, 所述第二 E-TFCI是 预定义的或可配置的。 The processor is configured to confirm that the user equipment has received the handover indication information based on the first E-TFCI, where the first E-TFCI is predefined or configurable; or, the third The second E-TFCI confirms that the user equipment has received the handover indication information, and the second E-TFCI is predefined or configurable.
114、如权利要求 111所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述基站还包括译码器, 用于在预定义或预配置的时间点开始以目标 ΤΉ译码所述用户设备发送的上 行数据, 所述目标 ΤΉ与所述切换指示信息对应。 114. The base station of claim 111, wherein the base station further includes a decoder configured to start decoding the uplink data sent by the user equipment with a target TΉ at a predefined or preconfigured time point, The target ΤΉ corresponds to the switching instruction information.
PCT/CN2013/084194 2013-04-12 2013-09-25 Tti switching method, base station and user equipment WO2014166214A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201380010284.6A CN105264950B (en) 2013-04-12 2013-09-25 A kind of TTI switching method, base station and user equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN2013074176 2013-04-12
CNPCT/CN2013/074176 2013-04-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014166214A1 true WO2014166214A1 (en) 2014-10-16

Family

ID=51688906

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2013/084194 WO2014166214A1 (en) 2013-04-12 2013-09-25 Tti switching method, base station and user equipment

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN104521281A (en)
WO (1) WO2014166214A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017079870A1 (en) * 2015-11-09 2017-05-18 华为技术有限公司 Transmission time interval switching method, communication system, user equipment and evolved node b
US11234289B2 (en) * 2016-09-28 2022-01-25 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods, network node and wireless device for discontinuous transmission
US11362766B2 (en) 2016-11-14 2022-06-14 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for obtaining HARQ feedback and method and apparatus for transmitting HARQ feedback

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3300434B1 (en) * 2015-06-11 2019-08-07 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Drx implementation method, configuration method and relevant device
EP3340714B1 (en) 2015-09-15 2020-05-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for sending or receiving control information
WO2017132997A1 (en) 2016-02-05 2017-08-10 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Switching resource configuration method, network access point and mobile station
CN107371267B (en) * 2016-05-13 2019-09-17 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of data transmission method and terminal
CN108702652B (en) * 2016-08-09 2021-02-12 华为技术有限公司 TTI switching method and device
WO2018027949A1 (en) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, network device, and terminal
EP4090087A1 (en) 2017-03-23 2022-11-16 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Method and device for determining timer configuration
CN109842940B (en) 2017-11-27 2021-09-07 华为技术有限公司 Link recovery method, terminal equipment and network equipment

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101594650A (en) * 2008-05-30 2009-12-02 华为技术有限公司 The methods, devices and systems of configuring transmission time interval bonding
WO2010124438A1 (en) * 2009-04-27 2010-11-04 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for switching

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR100735346B1 (en) * 2004-05-04 2007-07-04 삼성전자주식회사 A method and apparatus for TTI change considering HARQ process for Enhanced uplink dedicated channel
US8811335B2 (en) * 2007-04-20 2014-08-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for dynamic adjustment of uplink transmission time

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101594650A (en) * 2008-05-30 2009-12-02 华为技术有限公司 The methods, devices and systems of configuring transmission time interval bonding
WO2010124438A1 (en) * 2009-04-27 2010-11-04 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for switching

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017079870A1 (en) * 2015-11-09 2017-05-18 华为技术有限公司 Transmission time interval switching method, communication system, user equipment and evolved node b
CN108353324A (en) * 2015-11-09 2018-07-31 华为技术有限公司 The method and communication system of converting transmission time interval, user equipment and base station
EP3361776A4 (en) * 2015-11-09 2018-10-03 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Transmission time interval switching method, communication system, user equipment and evolved node b
US11234289B2 (en) * 2016-09-28 2022-01-25 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods, network node and wireless device for discontinuous transmission
US11362766B2 (en) 2016-11-14 2022-06-14 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for obtaining HARQ feedback and method and apparatus for transmitting HARQ feedback

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104521281A (en) 2015-04-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10986549B2 (en) Handover method and device
WO2014166214A1 (en) Tti switching method, base station and user equipment
CN107113291B (en) Evolved data compression scheme signaling
JP5714146B2 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting uplink protocol changes
JP5180325B2 (en) PDCP status report transmission method
US8706129B2 (en) Method of improving semi-persistent scheduling resources reconfiguration in a wireless communication system and related communication device
RU2460242C2 (en) Methods and systems to observe delivery procedure during service transfer with application of timer in mobile communication
JP6184598B2 (en) Method and apparatus for avoiding power scaling in uplink data transmission
JP6807856B2 (en) Low latency uplink acknowledgment channel waveform design
JP2007516661A (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus with reconfigurable architecture to support enhanced uplink soft handover operation
WO2015058336A1 (en) Device and method for data transmission
JP2008005494A (en) Method and apparatus for handling downlink data upon handover in wireless communications system
WO2010124438A1 (en) Method and device for switching
WO2014190550A1 (en) Communication method, base station and user equipment
CN113039734A (en) Apparatus, method and computer program
US11381347B2 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2014117391A1 (en) Data transmission method, base station, and user equipment
JP2007243956A (en) Method and device for starting retransmission of scheduling information in radio communication system
CN104641587B (en) For carrying out the method and apparatus of enhanced situation re-transmission
JP2011517177A (en) Provision of serving HS-DSCH cell change confirmation response
WO2015018009A1 (en) Method for automatic retransmission, user equipment, and base station
WO2014101061A1 (en) Method, user equipment, and base station for controlling uplink carrier aggregation
JPWO2020090442A1 (en) Wireless communication method and equipment
CN105264950B (en) A kind of TTI switching method, base station and user equipment
WO2023011030A1 (en) Method and apparatus for activating data packet, network device, and terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201380010284.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13881621

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13881621

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1